Pioneer Stereo Receiver VSX 59TXi User Manual

AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL  
RECEIVER  
VSX-59TXi  
Register your product at  
www.pioneerelectronics.com  
• Protect your new investment  
The details of your purchase will be on file for reference in the event of an  
insurance claim such as loss or theft.  
• Receive free tips, updates and service bulletins on  
your new product  
• Improve product development  
Your input helps us continue to design products that meet your needs.  
• Receive a free Pioneer newsletter  
Registered customers can opt in to receive a monthly newsletter.  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
READ INSTRUCTIONS — All the safety and  
operating instructions should be read before the  
product is operated.  
RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS — The safety and  
operating instructions should be retained for  
future reference.  
HEED WARNINGS — All warnings on the product  
and in the operating instructions should be  
adhered to.  
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS — All operating and use  
instructions should be followed.  
CLEANING — The product should be cleaned only  
with a polishing cloth or a soft dry cloth. Never  
clean with furniture wax, benzine, insecticides  
or other volatile liquids since they may corrode  
the cabinet.  
ATTACHMENTS — Do not use attachments not  
recommended by the product manufacturer as  
they may cause hazards.  
WATER AND MOISTURE — Do not use this  
product near water — for example, near a  
bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry  
tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming  
pool; and the like.  
ACCESSORIES — Do not place this product on an  
unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table.  
The product may fall, causing serious injury to a  
child or adult, and serious damage to the  
product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,  
bracket, or table recommended by the  
manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any  
mounting of the product should follow the  
manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a  
mounting accessory recommended by the  
manufacturer.  
GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION  
OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY — Never push  
objects of any kind into this product through  
openings as they may touch dangerous voltage  
points or short-out parts that could result in a  
fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any  
kind on the product.  
SERVICING — Do not attempt to service this  
product yourself as opening or removing covers  
may expose you to dangerous voltage or other  
hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service  
personnel.  
If this product is equipped with a polarized  
alternating current line plug (a plug having one  
blade wider than the other), it will fit into the  
outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If  
you are unable to insert the plug fully into the  
outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should  
still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace  
your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety  
purpose of the polarized plug.  
If this product is equipped with a three-wire  
grounding type plug, a plug having a third  
(grounding) pin, it will only fit into a grounding  
type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you  
are unable to insert the plug into the outlet,  
contact your electrician to replace your obsolete  
outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the  
grounding type plug.  
DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE — Unplug this  
product from the wall outlet and refer servicing  
to qualified service personnel under the  
following conditions:  
When the power-supply cord or plug is  
damaged.  
If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen  
into the product.  
POWER-CORD PROTECTION — Power-supply  
cords should be routed so that they are not likely  
to be walked on or pinched by items placed  
upon or against them, paying particular  
attention to cords at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from  
the product.  
OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING — If an  
outside antenna or cable system is connected to  
the product, be sure the antenna or cable  
system is grounded so as to provide some  
protection against voltage surges and built-up  
static charges. Article 810 of the National  
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides  
information with regard to proper grounding of  
the mast and supporting structure, grounding of  
the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit,  
size of grounding conductors, location of  
antenna-discharge unit, connection to  
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
If the product does not operate normally by  
following the operating instructions. Adjust only  
those controls that are covered by the operating  
instructions as an improper adjustment of other  
controls may result in damage and will often  
require extensive work by a qualified technician  
to restore the product to its normal operation.  
If the product has been dropped or damaged in  
any way.  
When the product exhibits a distinct change in  
performance — this indicates a need for service.  
REPLACEMENT PARTS — When replacement parts  
are required, be sure the service technician has  
used replacement parts specified by the  
manufacturer or have the same characteristics  
as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions  
may result in fire, electric shock, or other  
hazards.  
SAFETY CHECK — Upon completion of any service  
or repairs to this product, ask the service  
technician to perform safety checks to  
determine that the product is in proper  
operating condition.  
WALL OR CEILING MOUNTING — The product  
should not be mounted to a wall or ceiling.  
HEAT — The product should be situated away from  
heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,  
stoves, or other products (including amplifiers)  
that produce heat.  
CART — A product and cart combination should be  
moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force,  
and uneven surfaces may cause the product  
and cart combination to overturn.  
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the  
grounding electrode. See Figure A.  
LIGHTNING — For added protection for this  
product during a lightning storm, or when it is  
left unattended and unused for long periods of  
time, unplug it from the wall outlet and  
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This  
will prevent damage to the product due to  
lightning and power-line surges.  
POWER LINES — An outside antenna system  
should not be located in the vicinity of overhead  
power lines or other electric light or power  
circuits, or where it can fall into such power  
lines or circuits. When installing an outside  
antenna system, extreme care should be taken  
to keep from touching such power lines or  
circuits as contact with them might be fatal.  
OVERLOADING — Do not overload wall outlets,  
extension cords, or integral convenience  
receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or  
electric shock.  
VENTILATION — Slots and openings in the cabinet  
are provided for ventilation and to ensure  
reliable operation of the product and to protect  
it from overheating, and these openings must  
not be blocked or covered. The openings should  
never be blocked by placing the product on a  
bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This  
product should not be placed in a built-in  
installation such as a bookcase or rack unless  
proper ventilation is provided or the  
ANTENNA  
LEAD IN  
WIRE  
GROUND  
CLAMP  
manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered  
to.  
ANTENNA  
DISCHARGE UNIT  
(NEC SECTION 810-20)  
POWER SOURCES — This product should be  
operated only from the type of power source  
indicated on the marking label. If you are not  
sure of the type of power supply to your home,  
consult your product dealer or local power  
company.  
ELECTRIC  
SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS  
(NEC SECTION 810-21)  
LOCATION – The appliance should be installed in a  
stable location.  
GROUND CLAMPS  
NONUSE PERIODS – The power cord of the  
appliance should be unplugged from the outlet  
when left un-used for a long period of time.  
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING  
ELECTRODE SYSTEM  
(NEC ART 250, PART H)  
Fig. A  
NEC — NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
D1-4-2-2_En  
CAUTION : USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE  
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.  
CAUTION : THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. D6-8-2-1_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For U.S. and Australia Model  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or  
cords associated with accessories sold with the  
product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to  
the State of California and other governmental  
entities to cause cancer and birth defects or other  
reproductive harm.  
Wash hands after handling  
D36-P4_En  
C67-7-3_En  
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime  
Used wisely, your new sound equipment will  
provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since  
hearing damage from loud noise is often  
undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer  
and the Electronic Industries Association’s  
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid  
prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of  
sound levels is included for your protection.  
Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit  
you’ve just purchased is only the start of your  
musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how  
you can maximize the fun and excitement your  
equipment offers. This manufacturer and the  
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer  
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of  
your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that  
lets the sound come through loud and clear without  
annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly,  
without affecting your sensitive hearing.  
Decibel  
Level Example  
30 Quiet library, soft whispers  
40 Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic  
50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office  
60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine  
70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant  
80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock  
at two feet.  
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing  
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound.  
So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and  
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by  
setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your  
hearing adapts.  
THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS  
UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE  
90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower  
100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill  
120 Rock band concert in front of speakers,  
thunderclap  
To establish a safe level:  
• Start your volume control at a low setting.  
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it  
comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.  
140 Gunshot blast, jet plane  
180 Rocket launching pad  
Once you have established a comfortable sound  
level:  
• Set the dial and leave it there.  
Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.  
Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent  
hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we  
want you listening for a lifetime.  
S001_En  
The STANDBY/ON switch is secondary connected  
and therefore, does not separate the unit from mains  
power in STANDBY position. Therefore install the  
unit suitable places easy to disconnect the MAINS  
plug in case of the accident. The MAINS plug of unit  
should be unplugged from the wall socket when left  
If the socket outlets on the associated equipment  
are not suitable for the plug supplied with the  
product, the plug must be removed and appropriate  
one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug  
on the power supply cord of this unit should be  
perfomed only by qualified service personnel. The  
cut-off plug must be disposed of as an electrical  
shock hazard could exist if connected to a socket  
unused for a long period of time.  
D3-4-2-2-2a_En  
outlet.  
D3-4-2-2-1a_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders  
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders  
not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby  
Surround sources, but will also generate convincing  
surround sound for any stereo source.  
Our philosophy  
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater  
listening experience as close as possible to the vision of  
the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they  
created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing  
on three important steps:  
THX certified design  
1
Achieving the highest possible sound quality  
This receiver is THX Ultra2™ certified, allowing you to  
take advantage of new THX technologies such as ASA  
(Advanced Speaker Array), which can process any 5.1  
channel source for 6.1 channel (THX Surround EX) or 7.1  
channel (THX Ultra2™ Cinema and THX MusicMode)  
playback. These features are also available when using  
the i.LINK interface.  
2
Allowing for customized acoustic calibration  
according to any listening area  
3
Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world-  
1
class studio engineers  
Features  
Windows Media® Audio 9 Professional decoding  
It is possible to listen to the Windows Media® Audio 9  
Professional (WMA9 Pro) discrete surround format using  
the on-board WMA9 Pro decoder, or through the USB  
connection using a software decoder on your computer.  
Easy setup using Advanced MCACC  
Setting up for home theater sound is as easy as  
connecting your speakers, a DVD player or other source,  
and your TV. The Auto Surround Setup provides a quick  
but accurate surround sound setup, while for complete  
surround sound control you still have access to the full  
range of surround sound settings.  
Seamless video conversion  
With the Pioneer video converter, you can use a wide  
range of cords interchangeably, giving you more  
flexibility when making video connections.  
In addition, the Profession Acoustic Calibration EQ setup  
measures the reverb characteristics of your listening  
area, allowing you to customize your system calibration  
with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed  
on-screen, or using a computer.  
Easy-to-use remote control  
The remote control gives you not only complete control  
over every function of this receiver, but also over the main  
functions for other components in your home theater  
system. Using a system of preset codes, you can  
program the remote to operate a wide range of other  
equipment.  
i.LINK digital interface  
The i.LINK interface makes it possible to connect this  
receiver to i.LINK-equipped components, allowing you to  
enjoy high sampling rate (up to 192kHz) PCM  
multichannel digital audio from DVD-Audio and SACD  
discs, as well as digital audio from DVD-Video, CD and  
Video CD discs, all with a single cable.  
Energy-saving design  
This receiver is designed to use less than 0.65 W of  
energy when in standby.  
USB digital interface  
It is possible to listen to multichannel audio sources from  
your computer by connecting to the USB interface on the  
rear of this receiver. Depending on your model of  
computer and the software installed, you can listen to  
any source compatible with your operating system  
through the speaker setup connected to this receiver.  
1
With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has  
been designated AIR Studios Monitor Reference:  
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby  
Digital EX, DTS 96/24 and DTS-ES  
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound  
right into your home with up to six channels of surround  
sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects)  
channel for deep, realistic sound effects.  
“i.LINK” and the i.LINK logo are trademarks of the Sony  
Corporation.  
With the addition of a surround back speaker, you can  
take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-  
ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
03 Controls and displays  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Basic remote control displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Remote control displays for the tuner . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Remote control displays for other components . . . 36  
01 Before you start  
Checking the supplied accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Operating range of the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Recharging the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Setting up the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Calibrating the remote control screen . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Setting the button alert volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Setting the time-out setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Resetting the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Locking the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Restarting the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Replacing the lithium-ion batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
04 Getting started  
Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Automatically setting up for surround sound . . . . . . 39  
Other problems when using the Auto Surround  
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Checking the settings on your DVD (or other)  
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Playing a source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
05 Listening to your system  
About the listening modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Listening with headphones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Using the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Using the Stream Direct mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ. . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Selecting the input signal type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Selecting USB and multichannel analog  
input channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Listening to high-sampling formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Using the surround back channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Listening with virtual surround back speakers . . . . . 51  
Creating a center speaker effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Using Hi-bit and Hi-sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Using Midnight and Loudness listening . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Using the tone control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Switching the tone control on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Reducing noise during playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Listening to dual mono soundtracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
02 Connecting your equipment  
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
When making cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Connecting your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Connecting a DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Connecting the multichannel analog outputs . . . . 18  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other  
set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Connecting a VCR or DVD recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Connecting other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Using the component video jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
About the video converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Connecting digital audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Connecting analog audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs. . 25  
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Placing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Connecting antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
About the AC outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
06 Using the tuner  
Finding a station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
MPX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Memorizing station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Listening to memorized station presets . . . . . . . . . 56  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multi-room setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Making multi-room connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Using the sub room controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Using the i.LINK interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
About i.LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
About PQLS rate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Creating an i.LINK network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Using the USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . 88  
07 The Surround Setup menu  
Making receiver settings from the Surround  
Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Speaker Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Acoustic Calibration EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ . . . . . . . . . . 63  
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Checking your surround settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
11 Advanced setup  
The Input Assign menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Assigning the digital inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Assigning the component video inputs . . . . . . . . . 91  
Assigning the i.LINK inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Assigning the video inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
The Expert Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
OSD Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Bass Peak Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Function Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
OSD Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
12 Volt Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Multi-Room Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
THX Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Surround Back Speaker Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
08 Controlling other equipment  
Using the remote control with other components . . 67  
Recalling preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Programming signals from other remote controls . . 69  
Remote Direct function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Editing remote control button names . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Multi Operation and System Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Programming a multi operation or a  
shutdown sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Switching components on and off using the  
12 volt trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Operating other Pioneer components with this  
unit’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
09 Using other functions  
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Monitoring your recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Adjusting the delay of a soundtrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Watching video and audio sources independently. . 76  
Enhancing SACD playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Using the A/D converters to give greater definition  
to 2-channel sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Switching the speaker impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Default receiver settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
12 Additional information  
Optimizing your speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Basic surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Speaker system setup for DVD-Audio/  
multichannel music sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
i.LINK interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
i.LINK messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Dolby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Windows Media® Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . 109  
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
About THX® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Maintenance of external surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
10 Other connections  
Using speaker system B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Using speaker system B in another room . . . . . . . 80  
Alternating surround speaker setups using  
speaker system B (ITU-R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Bi-amping your front speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Bi-wiring your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Adding a second set of surround speakers for  
Bi-Surround. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Using the pre-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Connecting additional amplifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Connecting an external stereo pre-amplifier . . . . . 83  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
CBhaepfteor 1re you start  
• U-shaped connectors x2 (attached to back of  
receiver)  
Checking the supplied accessories  
Please check that you've received the following supplied  
accessories:  
• Microphone  
• These operating instructions  
• Warranty card  
Ventilation  
• Remote control unit  
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space  
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat dispersal  
(at least 8 in. (20 cm) at the top). If not enough space is  
provided between the unit and walls or other equipment,  
heat will build up inside, interfering with performance  
and/or causing malfunctions.  
• Remote control unit recharger and AC adapter  
8 inches  
(20 cm)  
Receiver  
Slot and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation and to protect the equipment from  
overheating. To prevent fire hazard, do not place anything  
on top of the unit, make sure the openings are never  
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,  
table-cloths and curtains), and do not operate the  
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.  
• AM loop antenna  
• FM wire antenna  
• Power cord  
Installing the receiver  
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a  
level and stable surface.  
Don’t install it on the following places:  
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)  
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off  
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.  
– in direct sunlight  
– in damp or wet areas  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
– in extremely hot or cold areas  
– in places where there is vibration or other movement  
– in places that are very dusty  
2
Place the remote control on the recharger,  
aligning the indent on the bottom of the remote  
with the tabs on the recharger.  
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)  
Using the remote control  
Keep the following in mind when using the remote  
control:  
Operating range of the remote control  
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the  
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.  
• When the remote control is recharging, you’ll see the  
indicator appear in the upper right corner of the  
display:  
• The remote has a range of about 23 feet (7 meters).  
30  
30  
Note  
• If the remote hasn’t been charged for awhile, the  
remote control display may remain blank for several  
minutes before the touch screen appears. If it  
continues to remain blank, try lifting the remote  
control up from the recharger and reseating it on the  
recharger. If after several tries, this does not work,  
see Replacing the lithium-ion batteries on page 12.  
23 feet (7m)  
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong  
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s  
remote sensor.  
• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere  
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other  
equipment located close to this unit.  
Setting up the remote control  
After you have calibrated the screen and set the display  
clock, use the other settings to customize your remote  
control.  
Recharging the remote control  
When the battery indicator on the remote control display  
shows that the rechargeable battery is almost depleted,  
recharge the remote as shown below. To make sure the  
battery doesn’t run out completely, simply leave the  
remote control in the recharger when not in use.  
Note  
• The remote control operations in this section are  
accessed from the remote setup menu. To go to the  
Caution  
SETUP  
remote setup menu, press  
control Home menu ( ):  
from the remote  
• Do not use AC adaptors other than the one supplied.  
1
Connect the AC adaptor to the recharger and  
plug it into an AC outlet.  
HOME  
1/3  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
2
3
TV  
/ DVD  
DVR  
/ LD  
SAT  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
SETUP  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
There are three remote setup menu screens, which  
can be navigated by using the touch panel ꢀ/ꢁ  
(cursor left/right) soft keys:  
Setting the clock  
The remote control features a clock that shows both 12  
and 24 hour formats.  
1
Press CLOCK DISPLAY to select either AM/PM or  
SETUP  
1/3  
SETUP  
2/3  
24H display format.  
Each press switches between the two settings. The  
current display format is shown after CLOCK DISPLAY.  
CALIBRATE  
CLOCK DISPLAY : AM/PM  
CLOCK SETTING  
BEEP :  
PRESET RECALL  
LEARNING  
SETUP  
2/3  
MULTI OPERATION  
DIRECT FUNCTION  
TIMEOUT  
CLOCK DISPLAY : AM/PM  
CLOCK SETTING  
BEEP :  
KEY LABEL  
TIMEOUT  
• For more on navigating the remote control menu  
screens, see Basic remote control displays on  
page 33.  
KEY LABEL  
Calibrating the remote control screen  
This will make sure the remote control responds correctly  
when you touch it.  
2
Press CLOCK SETTING to set the date.  
Use the + and buttons to set the year, month and day.  
1
Press CALIBRATE.  
SETUP  
2/3  
1/2  
DATE  
CLOCK DISPLAY : AM/PM  
CLOCK SETTING  
BEEP :  
SETUP  
1/3  
+
+
/10  
-
+
/09  
CALIBRATE  
2003  
-
PRESET RECALL  
LEARNING  
-
TIMEOUT  
NEXT  
CANCEL  
KEY LABEL  
MULTI OPERATION  
DIRECT FUNCTION  
3
Press NEXT to continue and set the time.  
Use the + and buttons to set the hour and minute.  
2
Press the center of each cross point to align the  
touch screen with the LCD panel underneath.  
This adjustment will make sure your remote control is  
calibrated correctly.  
2/2  
TIME  
+
17  
+
08  
-
:
-
ENTER  
CANCEL  
PLEASE TOUCH  
THE UPPER "+" MARK  
4
Press ENTER when you’re finished.  
"MUTE": CANCEL  
You’ll return to the remote setup menu.  
When you've touched both cross points, PLEASE WAIT is  
displayed and you’ll return to the remote setup menu  
when calibration is finished.  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
3
Press ENTER when you’re finished.  
Setting the button alert volume  
You can set the volume of the ‘beep’ you hear when you  
press a button on the remote.  
You’ll return to the remote setup menu.  
Resetting the remote control  
Use this feature to reset the remote control settings to  
the factory defaults.  
Press BEEP to select a setting.  
Each press selects between quiet, loud or off. The current  
setting is shown on the touch screen.  
SETUP  
2/3  
Important  
CLOCK DISPLAY : AM/PM  
CLOCK SETTING  
BEEP :  
• Doing this will erase any of your personalized  
settings.  
1
Press RESET TO DEFAULT.  
TIMEOUT  
SETUP  
3/3  
KEY LABEL  
RESET TO DEFAULT  
Setting the time-out setting  
• Default setting: 60sec  
To save battery life, a timer automatically switches off the  
remote control off after a set amount of time if no  
commands are entered. You can adjust separate time-  
out settings for the LCD, and the remote backlight.  
2
Confirm by pressing YES after reading each  
screen.  
1
Press TIMEOUT.  
RESET  
RESET  
SETUP  
2/3  
CLOCK DISPLAY : AM/PM  
CLOCK SETTING  
BEEP :  
Do you want to reset  
the REMOTE to the  
DEFAULT settings ?  
ALL settings you made  
will be ERASED.  
Is it all right?  
YES  
NO  
YES  
NO  
TIMEOUT  
KEY LABEL  
After the screen goes blank, the Home menu appears  
within a minute or so, and the remote control will be reset  
to the default settings.  
2
Use the + and – buttons to set the LCD TIMEOUT  
and BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT settings.  
You can adjust these from 20–120 seconds.  
• The backlight timeout can’t be longer than the LCD  
timeout setting.  
TIMEOUT  
LCD TIME OUT  
-
+
+
60 sec  
BACKLIGHT TIME OUT  
60 sec  
-
ENTER  
CANCEL  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
2
Remove the battery cover.  
Locking the remote control  
This receiver has a remote control lock feature that  
makes the remote control touch screen and hard keys  
inoperative.  
1
At the same time, press the and hard keys  
for about three seconds.  
• This is not possible from the remote setup screen.  
3
Use a pen or other sharp instrument to press the  
reset button located in the hole to the right (above  
the battery).  
ENTER  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
MUTE  
T
E
S
E
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
RESET  
RECEIVER  
LOCKED! shows on the touch screen to indicate the  
remote control is locked.  
After restarting the remote control, the touch screen  
shows the Home menu.  
2
To unlock the remote control, repeat step 1.  
Once the remote control is unlocked, the touch screen  
shows the Home menu.  
Replacing the lithium-ion batteries  
If you notice that the remote will no longer hold a charge,  
you may need to replace the lithium-ion battery cells.  
Restarting the remote control  
If the remote control display freezes during operation  
(none of the buttons seem to work), you may need to  
restart the unit.  
Caution  
• The lithium-ion batteries may present a fire or  
chemical burn hazard if misused. Do not  
disassemble, heat above 100˚C (212˚F), or  
incinerate.  
Important  
• Doing this will not erase any of your personalized  
settings or presets except for the clock setting.  
• Replacement cells must be of type AZW7264,  
manufactured by NEC TOKIN Corporation. Use of any  
other battery cells may result in fire or explosion.  
Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division to  
obtain new batteries. Replacement cells are not  
covered under warranty.  
1
Use a small phillips screwdriver to remove the  
screw fixing the battery cover to the back of the  
remote.  
• Dispose of used battery cells immediately after  
replacement. Keep away from children.  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public institution’s rules that apply in your country or  
area.  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
1
Use a small phillips screwdriver to remove the  
screw fixing the battery cover to the back of the  
remote.  
2
Remove the battery cover.  
3
Disconnect the old battery cell from the unit.  
Do not pull the connector out by holding onto the  
attached wires. Hold the connector firmly with your  
fingers, or use a small screwdriver (or other sharp tool) to  
disconnect it.  
4
Connect the new battery cell.  
Push the connector in until it is fully inserted. Make sure  
you keep the wire out of the way and line up the cell  
properly so that the battery cover can be closed easily.  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
02  
CChaoptnern2 ecting your equipment  
This receiver provides you with almost limitless possibilities for connecting your audio/video system, but it doesn’t  
have to be difficult. Depending on your needs, you could be up and running in no time after a few simple connections.  
This section has been designed so that you can read through this short introduction, then jump to the specific  
connections that you need to make. For a basic home theater setup, you may only need to look through the TV, DVD  
and speaker connections.  
Rear panel  
AC OUTLET  
Hz  
00W (0.8A) MAX  
R
IN  
AC IN  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
L
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
SUR-  
ROUND  
RROUND BACK &  
B
)
R
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
L
(Single)  
SUR-  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
1
18  
DC OUT 12V  
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
12V TRIGGER  
L
VIDEO  
2
SPEAK  
• If a connected component does not correspond to  
the input function (DVD/LD, etc.), see Assigning the  
digital inputs on page 90 to assign it properly.  
Caution  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch  
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Plugging in components should be the  
last connection you make with your system.  
4
Stereo analog audio source inputs/outputs  
Four sets of analog audio jacks for connection to audio  
sources such as CD players, tape decks and turntables.  
The CD-R/TAPE 1/MD and TAPE 2 MONITOR functions  
also feature outputs for recording. See Connecting  
analog audio sources on page 24 for connection details.  
1
USB audio input  
The USB audio input allows you to use your PC as a  
playback source for stereo or multichannel digital audio.  
See Using the USB interface on page 87 for connection  
details.  
5
Multichannel analog audio inputs  
7.1 channel analog inputs for connection to a DVD player  
with multichannel analog outputs. See Connecting the  
multichannel analog outputs on page 18 for connection  
details.  
2
Digital audio outputs  
Two optical digital audio outputs for connecting to a CD,  
MD or other digital recorder. See Connecting a VCR or  
DVD recorder on page 20 for connection details.  
6
i.LINK connectors  
Two S400-type i.LINK connectors allow you to connect  
this receiver to other compatible i.LINK audio devices for  
high-resolution, multichannel digital audio input/output.  
See Using the i.LINK interface on page 85 for connection  
details.  
3
Digital audio inputs  
Three optical and three coaxial digital audio inputs for  
connecting digital audio sources to this receiver. There’s  
also a 2RF IN jack for connection to an LD player with  
a 2RF output.  
All the inputs are freely assignable to input functions for  
maximum flexibility.  
7
Turntable ground  
A grounding (earth) terminal for use with turntables that  
require it. See Connecting analog audio sources on  
page 24 for connection details.  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
02  
8
Pre-amplifier output/power amplifier input  
17 Antenna terminals  
Connections for AM and FM radio antennas. See  
Connecting antennas on page 28 for connection details.  
When using this receiver as an integrated amplifier, leave  
the pre-amp outputs connected to the power amp inputs  
with the supplied U-shaped connectors. Removing these  
connectors allows you to use this unit as a pre-amplifier  
or power amplifier only, or to integrate another amplifier  
into your setup for more inputs. See Using the pre-outs on  
page 82 for connection details.  
18 12V trigger jacks  
These terminals output DC 12V according to the input  
functions (total 100 mA max.). See Switching  
components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on  
page 74 for connection details.  
9
Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs  
19 Speaker terminals  
Multichannel pre-amp outputs that you can use to  
connect separate amplifiers for center, surround,  
surround back and subwoofer channels. See Using the  
pre-outs on page 82 for connection details.  
These are the main speaker terminals for front, center,  
surround and surround back speakers. See Installing  
your speaker system on page 26 for connection details.  
20 AC power outlet  
10 Control input/output  
This 120V AC power outlet can be used to power another  
component in your setup (up to 100 W). Power to this  
outlet is switched off when the receiver is in standby.  
Mini jack terminals for connection to other Pioneer  
components to enable you to control all your equipment  
from a single IR remote sensor. See Operating other  
Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 74  
for connection details.  
21 AC power inlet  
Connect the supplied power cord here.  
11 Monitor video outputs  
22 B speaker terminals  
Three video outputs consisting of a standard composite  
video output and two S-video outputs, for connection to  
monitors and TVs. See Connecting your TV on page 16 for  
connection details.  
Stereo B speaker terminals that you can use to connect  
a second pair of speakers for use in another room, for  
example. See Using speaker system B on page 80 for  
connection details.  
12 Multi-room and source outputs  
Outputs for connection to a second amplifier in a  
separate room. See Multi-room setup on page 83.  
When making cable connections  
Be careful not to arrange cables in a manner that bends  
the cables over the top of this unit. If the cables are laid  
on top of the unit, the magnetic field produced by the  
transformers in this unit may cause a humming noise to  
come from the speakers.  
13 Audio/video source inputs  
Each of the seven source input functions has stereo  
analog audio jacks, a composite video jack and an S-  
video jack for basic connections. On top of these, you can  
assign digital audio and component video jacks to input  
functions as necessary. As well as audio/video inputs,  
the three input functions DVR/VCR 1, VCR 2 and VCR 3  
also have audio/video outputs for recording. See  
Connecting a VCR or DVD recorder on page 20 for  
connection details.  
14 Remote input (multi-room and source)  
The remote input allows you to connect an external  
remote control sensor, for use in a multi-room setup, for  
example. See Multi-room setup on page 83 for  
connection details.  
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when  
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter  
protecting the optical socket.  
15 Component video inputs/output  
The three component video inputs are freely assignable  
to any of the audio/video input functions. The component  
video output is for connection to a monitor or TV. See  
Using the component video jacks on page 22 for  
connection details.  
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable  
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.  
16 RS-232C connector  
This port is provided for connecting a personal computer  
for graphical output when using Advanced MCACC.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting your TV  
02  
This page shows you how to connect your TV to the  
receiver. To be able to play the sound from the TV’s built-  
in tuner, connect the analog audio outputs from your TV  
to this receiver.  
• Use a stereo RCA/phono jack cable for the  
connection.  
3
Connect a coaxial digital audio output from your  
TV to the DIGITAL 2 (TV/DVD) input on this receiver.  
• Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio for the  
connection.  
If your TV has a built-in digital decoder, you can connect  
the digital audio output to this receiver to enjoy Dolby  
Digital and DTS sound from digital TV broadcasts.  
• If your TV only has an optical digital output, you can  
connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver  
using an optical cable. When you set up the receiver  
you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you  
connected the TV to (see also Assigning the digital  
inputs on page 90).  
1
Connect the MONITOR OUT 1 video jack on this  
receiver to a video input on your TV.  
• You can use a standard RCA/phono jack video cable  
to connect to the composite video jack, or for higher  
quality video, you can use an S-video cable to  
connect to the S-video jack (S2 VIDEO).  
• See Using the component video jacks on page 22 if  
you want to use the component video outputs to  
connect this receiver to your TV.  
Note  
• If your TV doesn’t have a digital audio output, omit  
step 3 above.  
2
Connect the analog audio outputs from your TV  
to the TV/DVD AUDIO inputs on this receiver.  
• If you use different cord types for the TV and the  
source component, overlay information doesn’t  
appear.  
CONTROL  
A
MONITOR  
OUT 1  
DIGITAL  
USB AUDIO  
OUT  
IN  
ANTENNA  
L
REMOTE IN  
AC OUTLET  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
ROOM &  
SOURCE  
R  
ULTI ROOM &  
IN  
SOURCE  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
AC 120 V 60Hz  
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
SWITCHED 100W (0.8A) MAX  
DVD/  
LD  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
IN  
IN  
R
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
LD)  
IN  
1
Y
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
DVD  
N  
FM  
PB  
75UNBAL  
CENTER  
PB  
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
IN  
PR  
AC IN  
R
L
IN  
5
R
L
PR  
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
2
IN  
3
Y
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
L
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
4
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
SELECTABLE (SURROUND BACK &  
B
B
)
IN  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
R
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
2
1
R
L
TAPE 2  
MONITOR  
L
(TV/  
DVD)  
(Single)  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
FRONT  
R
L
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SUB W  
CENTER  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
R
L
L
R
R
SUR-  
-  
ND  
ROUND  
1
2RF  
IN  
(DVD/  
LD)  
BACK  
R
R
L(Single)  
DC OUT 12V  
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
SPEAKERS  
VSX-59TXi  
2
R
L
ANALOG AUDIO OUT  
1
3
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
IN IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
TV  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting a DVD player  
02  
CONTROL  
A
MONITOR  
OUT 1  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
IN  
USB AUDIO  
ANTENNA  
L
REMOTE IN  
AC OUTLET  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
ROOM &  
SOURCE  
MONITOR  
OUT 2  
MULTI ROOM &  
IN  
SOURCE  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
AC 120 V 60Hz  
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
SWITCHED 100W (0.8A) MAX  
DVD/  
LD  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
IN  
R
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
LD)  
N  
Y
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
FM  
PB  
75UNBAL  
CENTER  
P
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
PR  
AC IN  
R
L
IN  
5
R
L
PR  
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
2
IN  
3
Y
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
L
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
SELECTABLE (SURROUND BACK &  
B
B
)
IN  
IN  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
R
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
3
2
1
R
L
TAPE 2  
MONITOR  
L
(TV/  
DVD)  
(Single)  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
FRONT  
R
L
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SUB W  
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
R
L
L
R
R
SUR-  
SUR-  
ROUND  
ROUND  
1
(DVD/  
LD)  
BACK  
R
R
L(Single)  
DC OUT 12V  
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
SPEAKERS  
VSX-59TXi  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
R
AUDIO  
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
ANALOG OUT  
1
2
3
DVD player  
Different DVD players offer a different selection of  
connections, but all should give you at least a digital  
audio output, stereo analog audio outputs and a video  
output. Additionally, you may have a player with  
2
If your DVD player only has stereo analog audio  
outputs, connect these to the DVD/LD AUDIO inputs  
on this receiver.  
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the  
multichannel analog audio outputs and different kinds of  
video outputs to choose from.  
connections.  
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,  
see Connecting the multichannel analog outputs  
below for how to connect it.  
1
Connect a coaxial digital audio output on your  
DVD player to the DIGITAL 1 (DVD/LD) input on this  
receiver.  
3
Connect a composite or S-video output on your  
• Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio for the  
connection.  
DVD player to the DVD/LD VIDEO or DVD/LD S2  
VIDEO input on this receiver.  
• If your DVD player only has an optical digital output,  
you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this  
receiver using an optical cable. When you set up the  
receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input  
you connected the player to (see also Assigning the  
digital inputs on page 90).  
• Use a standard video cable or an S-video cable for the  
connection.  
• If your player also has a component video output, you  
can connect this too. See Using the component video  
jacks on page 22 for more on this.  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
02  
Connecting the multichannel analog outputs  
CONTROL  
A
MONITOR  
DIGITAL  
USB AUDIO  
OUT 1  
OUT  
IN  
ANTENNA  
L
REMOTE IN  
AC OUTLET  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
ROOM &  
SOURCE  
MONITOR  
OUT 2  
MULTI ROOM &  
IN  
SOURCE  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
AC 120 V 60Hz  
SWITCHED 100W (0.8A) MAX  
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
DVD/  
LD  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
IN  
IN  
R
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
LD)  
IN  
1
Y
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
FM  
PB  
75UNBAL  
CENTER  
PB  
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
PR  
AC IN  
R
L
IN  
5
R
L
PR  
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
2
IN  
3
Y
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
L
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
4
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
SELECTABLE (SURROUND BACK &  
B
B
)
IN  
IN  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
R
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
3
2
1
R
L
TAPE 2  
MONITOR  
L
(TV/  
DVD)  
(Single)  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
FRONT  
R
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SUB W  
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
L
L
R
R
SUR
ROUND  
BACK  
L(Single)  
ROUND  
1
2RF  
IN  
/  
LD)  
R
R
DC OUT 12V  
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
LTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
SPEAKERS  
VSX-59TXi  
R
R
L
FRONT  
SUB W. CENTER  
R
L
L
SURR.  
SURR.  
BACK  
MULTI CH  
OUTPUT  
MULTI CH. OUT  
1
2
DVD player  
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may  
have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending  
on whether your player supports surround back  
channels).  
2
If your DVD player also has outputs for surround  
back channels, connect these to the corresponding  
MULTI CH INPUTS on this receiver.  
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the  
connections.  
1
Connect the front, surround, center and  
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to  
the SURROUND BACK L (SINGLE) jack on this  
receiver.  
subwoofer outputs on your DVD player to the  
corresponding MULTI CH INPUTS on this receiver.  
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the  
connections.  
• Take care to connect each output to its  
corresponding input on the receiver.  
Note  
• To listen to multichannel analog audio you’ll need to  
switch the input signal selector to MULTI CH INPUT  
(see Playing a source on page 41 for more on this).  
See also Selecting USB and multichannel analog input  
channels on page 49.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
02  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box  
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV  
tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.  
• If your set-top box only has a coaxial digital output,  
you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this  
receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When  
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver  
which input you connected the set-top box to (see  
also Assigning the digital inputs on page 90).  
1
Connect a set of audio/video outputs on the set-  
top box component to the SAT AUDIO and VIDEO  
inputs on this receiver.  
• Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the  
audio connection and a video or S-video cable for the  
video connection.  
Note  
• If your satellite/cable receiver doesn’t have a digital  
audio output, omit step 2 above.  
2
Connect an optical digital audio output from  
your set-top box component to the DIGITAL 4 (SAT)  
input on this receiver.  
• Use an optical cable for the connection.  
CONTROL  
A
MONITOR  
DIGITAL  
USB AUDIO  
OUT 1  
OUT  
IN  
ANTENNA  
L
REMOTE IN  
AC OUTLET  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
ROOM &  
SOURCE  
MONITOR  
OUT 2  
MULTI ROOM &  
IN  
SOURCE  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
AC 120 V 60Hz  
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
SWITCHED 100W (0.8A) MAX  
DVD/  
LD  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
IN  
IN  
R
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
LD)  
IN  
1
Y
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
FM  
PB  
75UNBAL  
CENTER  
PB  
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
PR  
AC IN  
R
L
IN  
5
R
L
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
I
2
IN  
3
Y
T  
L
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
4
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
SELECTABLE (SURROUND BACK &  
B
B
)
IN  
IN  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
R
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
3
2
1
R
L
TAPE 2  
MONITOR  
L
(TV/  
DVD)  
(Single)  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
FRONT  
R
L
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SUB W  
CENTER  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
R
L
L
R
R
SUR-  
R
ROUND  
1
2RF  
IN  
(DVD/  
LD)  
BACK  
R
R
L(Single)  
DC OUT 12V  
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
SPEAKERS  
VSX-59TXi  
DIGITAL OUT  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
AV OUT  
STB  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
02  
Connecting a VCR or DVD recorder  
This receiver has three sets of audio/video inputs and  
outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video  
recorders, including VCRs, DVD-recorders and HDD  
recorders.  
3
Connect an optical digital audio output from the  
recorder to the DIGITAL 5 (DVR/VCR1) input on this  
receiver.  
• Use an optical cable for the connection.  
• If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output, you  
can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this  
receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When  
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver  
which input you connected the recorder to (see also  
Assigning the digital inputs on page 90).  
1
Connect a set of audio/video outputs on the  
recorder to the DVR/VCR1 AUDIO and VIDEO inputs  
on this receiver.  
• Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the  
audio connection and a video or S-video cable for the  
video connection.  
• The digital outputs from other recorders can be  
connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this  
receiver. You can assign them when setting up the  
receiver (see also Assigning the digital inputs on  
page 90).  
• For a second and third recorder, use the VCR2 IN and  
VCR3 IN inputs.  
2
Connect a set of audio/video inputs on the  
recorder to the DVR/VCR1 AUDIO and VIDEO outputs  
on this receiver.  
• Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the  
audio connection and a video or S-video cable for the  
video connection.  
Note  
• If your video component doesn’t have a digital audio  
output, omit step 3 above.  
• For a second and third recorder, use the VCR2 and  
VCR3 outputs.  
• In order to record, you must connect the analog  
audio cables (the digital connection is for playback  
only).  
VSX-59TXi  
CONTROL  
A
MONITOR  
DIGITAL  
OUT 1  
OUT  
IN  
USB AUDIO  
ANTENNA  
L
REMOTE IN  
AC OUTLET  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
ROOM &  
SOURCE  
MONITOR  
OUT 2  
MULTI ROOM &  
IN  
SOURCE  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
AC 120 V 60Hz  
SWITCHED 100W (0.8A) MAX  
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
DVD/  
LD  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
IN  
R
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
LD)  
IN  
1
Y
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
D
FM  
PB  
75UNBAL  
CENTER  
PB  
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
PR  
AC IN  
R
L
IN  
5
R
L
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
3
Y
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
L
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
4
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
SELECTABLE (SURROUND BACK &  
B
B
)
IN  
IN  
1
PR  
PB  
PR  
R
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
N  
T  
2  
3
2
1
R
R
L
TAPE 2  
MONITOR  
L
(TV/  
DVD)  
(Single)  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
FRONT  
L
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SUB  
W
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
R
L
L
R
R
SUR-  
UND  
SUR-  
ROUND  
1
2RF  
IN  
L
BACK  
R
R
L(Single)  
DC OUT 12V  
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
SPEAKERS  
3
1
2
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO  
AV OUT  
S-VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
AV IN  
DVR, VCR, etc.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
02  
Connecting other video sources  
You can basically use any of the audio/video inputs on  
this receiver for any kind of video source. The example  
illustration below shows a component connected to the  
VCR2 inputs.  
• You may need to assign the digital input you used  
when setting up the receiver (see also Assigning the  
digital inputs on page 90).  
3
If the source component is an LD player with a  
1
Connect the analog audio outputs and a video  
2RF digital audio output, connect this to the 2RF  
input on this receiver.  
To ensure compatibility with all laserdiscs, connect both  
output of the source component to a set of spare  
audio/video inputs on this receiver.  
• Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the  
audio connection and a video or S-video cable for the  
video connection.  
the PCM and 2RF outputs from your LD player.  
• Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio for the  
2RF connection.  
2
If the source component has a digital audio  
• You may need to assign the 2RF digital input when  
setting up the receiver (see also Assigning the digital  
inputs on page 90).  
output, connect it to a spare digital audio input on  
this receiver.  
• Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio or an  
optical cable for the connection depending on the  
type of input you used.  
CONTROL  
A
MONITOR  
DIGITAL  
OUT 1  
OUT  
IN  
USB AUDIO  
ANTENNA  
L
REMOTE IN  
AC OUTLET  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
ROOM &  
SOURCE  
MONITOR  
OUT 2  
MULTI ROOM &  
IN  
SOURCE  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
AC 120 V 60Hz  
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
SWITCHED 100W (0.8A) MAX  
DVD/  
LD  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
IN  
IN  
R
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
LD)  
IN  
1
Y
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
FM  
PB  
75UNBAL  
CENTER  
PB  
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
PR  
AC IN  
R
L
IN  
5
R
L
PR  
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
2
IN  
3
Y
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
L
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
4
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
SELECTABLE (SURROUND BACK &  
B
B
)
IN  
IN  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
R
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
3
2
1
R
L
TAPE 2  
MONITOR  
L
(TV/  
DVD)  
(Single)  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
FRONT  
R
L
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SUB W  
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
T  
I
R
L
L
R
R
SUR-  
SUR-  
ROUND  
ROUND  
1
2RF  
IN  
(DVD/  
)  
BACK  
R
R
L(Single)  
DC OUT 12V  
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
RS-232C  
ASSIGNA
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
SPEAKERS  
VSX-59TXi  
2
3
DIGITAL OUT  
1
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
PCM  
2RF  
AV OUT  
LD player, video player, TV game, etc.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
02  
Using the component video jacks  
Component video should deliver superior picture quality  
when compared to composite or S-video. A further  
advantage (if your source and TV are both compatible) is  
progressive-scan video, which delivers a very stable,  
flicker-free picture. See the manuals that came with your  
TV and source component to check whether they are  
compatible with progressive-scan video. Note that it is  
not possible to see overlay information when you have  
connected using component video cables.  
2
Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT  
jacks on this receiver to the component video inputs  
on your TV or monitor.  
• Use a three-way component video cable.  
About the video converter  
The video converter allows you to connect various video  
sources using composite, S-video or component video  
connections and the signal will be output through all of  
the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks. The only exception is  
component video input, which is only output from the  
component video output. Therefore, if you want to  
connect any source using component video, you must  
also connect your TV using component video. If several  
video components are connected to the same input  
function, the converter gives priority to component, S-  
video, then composite (in that order).  
1
Connect the component video outputs of your  
source to a set of component video inputs on this  
receiver.  
There are three component video inputs; they are all  
freely assignable (COMPONENT IN 1, as a default,  
should already be assigned to DVD/LD) so that they can  
be used in conjunction with any of the audio/video input  
functions of the receiver.  
Note that in most cases, you’ll need to assign the  
component video input (see Assigning the component  
video inputs on page 91), or else you may see the S-video  
or composite video input instead.  
• You can’t see overlay information if you use different  
cord types for the TV and the source component.  
• Also note that this feature is available with NTSC  
signals only. For a PAL signal, make sure you’ve used  
the same type of cable for your video component and  
monitor connections.  
• Use a three-way component video cable for the  
connection.  
CONTROL  
A
MONITOR  
DIGITAL  
USB AUDIO  
OUT 1  
OUT  
IN  
ANTENNA  
L
REMOTE IN  
AC OUTLET  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
ROOM &  
SOURCE  
MONITOR  
OUT 2  
MULTI ROOM &  
IN  
SOURCE  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
AC 120 V 60Hz  
SWITCHED 100W (0.8A) MAX  
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
DVD/  
LD  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
IN  
IN  
R
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
ANTENNA  
IN  
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MO
OUT  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
FM  
75UNBAL  
CENTER  
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
AC IN  
R
L
IN  
5
R
L
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
2
IN  
3
Y
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
L
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
4
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
SELECTABLE (SURROUND BACK &  
B
B
)
IN  
IN  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
R
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
3
2
1
R
R
L
TAPE 2  
MONITOR  
L
(TV/  
DVD)  
(Single)  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
FRONT  
L
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SUB  
W
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
R
L
L
R
R
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUR-  
ROUND  
1
2RF  
IN  
(DVD/  
LD)  
BACK  
R
R
L(Single)  
DC OUT 12V  
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
SPEAKERS  
VSX-59TXi  
1
2
Y
PB  
PR  
DVD player  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
Y
PB  
PR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
TV  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
02  
Connecting digital audio sources  
This receiver has both digital inputs and outputs,  
allowing you to connect digital components for playback  
and for making digital recordings. Many digital  
2
Connect one of the DIGITAL outputs on this  
receiver to a digital input on the component.  
• Use an optical cable to connect to the DIGITAL  
OUT1 or OUT2 (OUT1 is shown in the illustration  
below).  
components also have analog connections for recording  
analog sources (such as a turntable or tape deck). See  
Connecting analog audio sources below for more on this.  
1
Connect an optical digital audio output on your  
Note  
digital component to the DIGITAL 6 (CD-R/TAPE1/  
MD) input on this receiver.  
• In order to record some digital sources, you must  
make analog connections as explained in Connecting  
analog audio sources below.  
• Use an optical cable for the connection.  
• If your digital component only has a coaxial digital  
output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs  
on this receiver using a coaxial cable. When you set  
up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which  
input you connected the component to (see also  
Assigning the digital inputs on page 90).  
• This unit has an on-board WMA9 Pro decoder, so it is  
possible to playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using  
a coaxial or optical digital connection when  
connected to a WMA9 Pro-compatible player.  
However, the connected PC, DVD player, set-top box,  
etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro format audio  
signals through a coaxial or optical digital output.  
• The digital outputs from other components can be  
connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this  
receiver. You can assign them when setting up the  
receiver (see also Assigning the digital inputs on  
page 90).  
CONTROL  
A
MONITOR  
DIGITAL  
OUT 1  
OUT  
IN  
USB AUDIO  
ANTENNA  
L
REMOTE IN  
AC OUTLET  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
ROOM &  
SOURCE  
MONITOR  
OUT 2  
MULTI ROOM &  
IN  
SOURCE  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
AC 120 V 60Hz  
SWITCHED 100W (0.8A) MAX  
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
DVD/  
LD  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
IN  
IN  
R
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
LD)  
IN  
1
Y
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
FM  
P
B
75UNBAL  
CENTER  
P
B
R
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
PR  
AC IN  
R
L
IN  
5
L
P
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
L
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
4
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
SELECTABLE (SURROUND BACK &  
B
B
)
IN  
IN  
1
P
B
P
P
B
R
R
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
3
2
1
R
R
L
TAPE 2  
ONITOR  
P
R
L
(Single)  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN  
IN  
N  
Y  
L
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SUB  
W
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
R
L
L
R
R
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
L(Single)  
1
2RF  
IN  
(DVD/  
LD)  
R
R
DC OUT 12V  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
SPEAKERS  
VSX-59TXi  
1
2
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL IN  
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
02  
Connecting analog audio sources  
This receiver features four stereo audio-only inputs. Two  
of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with  
audio recorders.  
• Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the  
connections.  
• If your cassette deck has a monitoring function,  
connect it to the TAPE 2 MONITOR jacks on the rear  
panel. See Monitoring your recording on page 75 for  
more on this.  
One of the audio inputs (PHONO) is a dedicated  
turntable input which should not be used for any other  
type of component. This input also has a grounding  
terminal that most turntables require.  
2
Turntables only: Connect the stereo audio outputs  
1
Connect the analog audio outputs of the source  
to the PHONO inputs on this receiver.  
• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the  
ground terminal on this receiver.  
component to a set of spare audio inputs on this  
receiver.  
• If you’re connecting a tape deck, MD recorder, etc.,  
connect the analog audio outputs (REC) to the analog  
audio inputs on the recorder.  
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (no grounding  
wire), connect them to the CD inputs instead.  
1
Turntable  
CONTROL  
A
MONITOR  
DIGITAL  
USB AUDIO  
OUT 1  
OUT  
IN  
ANTENNA  
L
REMOTE IN  
AC OUTLET  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
ROOM &  
SOURCE  
MONITOR  
OUT 2  
MULTI ROOM &  
IN  
SOURCE  
FRONT  
AC 120 V 60Hz  
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
SWITCHED 100W (0.8A) MAX  
DVD/  
LD  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
IN  
IN  
R
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
LD)  
IN  
1
Y
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
FM  
PB  
75UNBAL  
CENTER  
PB  
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
PR  
AC IN  
L
IN  
5
R
PR  
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
2
IN  
3
Y
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
L
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
4
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
SELECTABLE (SURROUND BACK &  
B
B
)
IN  
IN  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
R
gle)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
3
2
1
L
TAPE 2  
MONITOR  
L
(TV/  
DVD)  
(Single)  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
FRONT  
R
L
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SUB W  
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
R
L
L
R
R
SUR-  
SUR-  
ROUND  
ROUND  
1
2RF  
IN  
(DVD/  
LD)  
BACK  
R
R
L(Single)  
DC OUT 12V  
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
SPEAKERS  
VSX-59TXi  
OUT  
PLAY  
2
IN  
REC  
Tape deck, etc.  
AUDIO
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
02  
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs  
The front panel inputs include a composite video jack  
(VIDEO), an S-video jack (S-VIDEO), stereo analog audio  
inputs (AUDIO L/R) and an optical digital audio input  
(DIGITAL). You can use these connections for any kind of  
audio/video component, but they are especially  
video games and portable audio/video equipment.  
• Pull down the front cover where indicated to access  
the front panel inputs.  
• The illustration below shows example connections to  
a portable DVD player.  
convenient for portable equipment such as camcorders,  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VSX-59TXi  
COLOR  
BRIGHT  
MONITOR  
VIDEO IN/OUT  
AUDIO IN/OUT  
PHONES  
ON/OFF  
HOLD  
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL)  
Portable DVD player, etc.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Installing your speaker system  
02  
To take full advantage of the receiver’s surround sound  
capabilities connect front, center, surround and  
main surround speakers should always be connected as  
a pair, but you can connect just one surround back  
speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left  
surround back terminal). You can use speakers with a  
nominal impedance between 4–16(please see  
Switching the speaker impedance on page 78 if you plan  
to use speakers with an impedance of less than 6).  
surround back speakers, as well as a subwoofer.  
Although this is ideal, other configurations with fewer  
speakers—no subwoofer or no center speaker, or even  
no surround speakers—will work. At the very least, front  
left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your  
Front  
right  
Front  
left  
Subwoofer  
Center  
LINE LEVEL  
INPUT  
CONTROL  
A
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
1
OUT  
IN  
USB AUDIO  
ANTENNA  
L
REMOTE IN  
AC OUTLET  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
MONITOR  
MULTI ROOM  
&
Y
IN  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
2
SOURCE  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
SOURCE  
AC 120 V 60Hz  
SWITCHED 100W (0.8A) MAX  
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
DVD/  
LD  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
IN  
R
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
LD)  
IN  
1
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
FM  
IN  
IN  
P
B
75UNBAL  
CENTER  
P
B
R
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
SAT  
IN  
PR  
AC IN  
R
L
IN  
5
R
L
P
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
2
IN  
3
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
L
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
4
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
SELECTABLE (SURROUND BACK &  
B
B
)
IN  
IN  
1
P
B
P
P
B
R
R
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
3
2
1
R
R
L
TAPE 2  
MONITOR  
P
R
L
(TV/  
(Single)  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
FRONT  
DVD)  
L
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SUB  
W
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
R
L
L
R
R
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUR-  
ROUND  
1
2RF  
IN  
(DVD/  
LD)  
BACK  
R
R
L(Single)  
DC OUT 12V  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
SPEAKERS  
VSX-59TXi  
Surround  
left  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
back right  
Surround  
back left  
Connecting the speakers  
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a  
positive (+) red, and negative (–) white terminal. For  
proper sound you should take care to match these up  
with the terminals on the speakers themselves.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
02  
Other connections on page 80 provides greater detail  
on alternate speaker setups such as using speaker  
system B (page 80), bi-surround (page 80), bi-amping  
(page 81) and bi-wiring (page 82).  
Caution  
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted  
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.  
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel  
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.  
Placing the speakers  
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect  
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines  
should help you to get the best sound from your system.  
(see also Optimizing your speaker setup on page 97).  
Bare wire connections  
Before you start connecting the speakers, make sure that  
the speaker cable you’re going to use is properly  
prepared with about 0.4 in. of insulator stripped from  
each wire, and the exposed wire strands twisted together.  
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the  
other speakers should be at about ear-level when  
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the  
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very  
high on a wall is not recommended.  
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers  
6–9 ft. apart, at equal distance from the TV.  
To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns  
until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire.  
Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal until the  
wire is firmly clamped.  
• Install the center speaker above or below the TV so  
that the sound of the center channel is localized at  
the TV screen.  
• When placing speakers near the TV, use magnetically  
shielded speakers to prevent possible interference,  
such as discoloration of the picture when the TV is  
switched on. If you do not have magnetically shielded  
speakers and notice discoloration of the TV picture,  
move the speakers farther away from the TV.  
• If possible, install the surround speakers slightly  
above ear level.  
Banana plug connections  
If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana  
plugs, screw the speaker terminal fully shut then plug the  
banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal.  
Front R  
Front L  
Sub-  
woofer  
Center  
Surround  
L
Surround  
R
Surround Surround  
back L back R  
Note  
Caution  
• Please refer to the manual that came with your  
speakers for details on how to connect the other end  
of the speaker cables to your speakers.  
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.  
This not only improves sound quality, but also  
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from  
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of  
external shocks such as earthquakes.  
• The speaker terminals on this receiver can be  
connected in a number of ways, depending on your  
setup. See Speaker Systems on page 58 for an  
overview of the possible configurations.  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting antennas  
02  
The supplied antennas provide a simple way to listen to  
AM and FM radio. If you find that reception quality is  
poor, an outdoor antenna should give you better sound  
quality—see Connecting external antennas below.  
CONTROL  
A
MONITOR  
DIGITAL  
USB AUDIO  
OUT 1  
OUT  
IN  
ANTENNA  
L
REMOTE IN  
AC OUTLET  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
ROOM &  
SOURCE  
MONITOR  
OUT 2  
MULTI ROOM &  
IN  
SOURCE  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
AC 120 V 60Hz  
SWITCHED 100W (0.8A) MAX  
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
DVD/  
LD  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
IN  
IN  
R
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
LD)  
IN  
1
Y
ANTENNA  
IN  
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
FM  
PB  
75UNBAL  
CENTER  
PB  
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
SAT  
IN  
IN  
PR  
AC IN  
R
L
IN  
5
R
L
PR  
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
2
IN  
3
Y
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
L
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
4
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
SELECTABLE (SURROUND BACK &  
B
B
)
IN  
IN  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
R
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
3
2
1
R
R
L
TAPE 2  
MONITOR  
L
(TV/  
DVD)  
(Single)  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
FRONT  
L
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SUB  
W
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
R
L
L
R
R
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
L(Single)  
1
2RF  
IN  
(DVD/  
LD)  
R
R
DC OUT 12V  
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
SPEAKERS  
VSX-59TXi  
AM loop antenna  
1 Assemble the stand as shown in the illustration.  
Note  
• The signal ground () is designed to reduce noise  
that occurs when an antenna is connected. It is not  
an electrical safety ground.  
fig. A  
fig. B  
fig. C  
FM wire antenna  
Connect the FM wire antenna to the FM UNBAL  
75in the same way as the AM antenna.  
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a  
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.  
• Bend the stand in the direction indicated (fig. A).  
• Clip the loop into the stand (fig. B).  
• It’s possible to fix the AM antenna to a wall (fig. C).  
Before fixing, make sure that the reception is  
satisfactory.  
Connecting external antennas  
To improve FM reception connect an external FM  
antenna to the FM UNBAL 75.  
2
Pull off the protective shields of both AM  
antenna wires.  
3
Press the AM LOOP antenna terminal tabs to  
open and insert one wire into each terminal.  
4
5
Release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.  
Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and point  
75coaxial cable  
ANTENNA  
in the direction giving the best reception.  
Avoid placing near computers, television sets or other  
electrical appliances and do not let it come into contact  
with metal objects.  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
FM  
75UNBAL  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
02  
To improve AM reception, connect a 16–19 ft. length of  
vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without  
disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.  
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally  
outdoors.  
Outdoor antenna  
Indoor antenna  
(vinyl-coated wire)  
ANTENNA  
15–18 ft.  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
FM  
75UNBAL  
Plugging in the receiver  
Only plug in after you have connected all your  
components, including the speakers.  
Caution  
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull  
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the  
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could  
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place  
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the  
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never  
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The  
power cords should be routed so that they are not  
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can  
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the  
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,  
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or  
your dealer for a replacement.  
1
Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN  
socket on the back of the receiver.  
2
Plug the other end into a power outlet.  
About the AC outlet  
Power supplied through this outlet is turned on and off by  
the receiver's power switch. Total electrical power  
consumption of connected equipment should not exceed  
100 W (0.8 A).  
Caution  
• Do not connect a monitor, TV set, heater, or similar  
appliance to this unit's AC outlet.  
• Do not connect appliances with high power  
consumption to the AC outlet in order to avoid  
overheating and fire risk. This can also cause the  
receiver to malfunction.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
CChaoptnert3rols and displays  
Front panel  
1
2 3  
4
5
6 7  
8
9
10 11  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER  
VSX-59TXi  
LISTENING MODE SELECTOR  
TURN/PUSH  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
CD-R/  
TAPE1/MD  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
DVR/VCR1  
VCR2  
VCR3  
CD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
OFF  
ON  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MASTER VOLUME  
16  
19  
20  
12  
13  
14 15  
17  
18  
MULTI ROOM & SOURCE  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
28  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
1
INPUT SELECTOR dial (page 41)  
5
Display  
Turn to select a source component. The input indicators  
show the current component.  
See Remote control on page 33.  
6
MCACC indicator (page 48)  
2
STANDBY/ON and power OFF / ON ꢃ  
Lights when Acoustic Calibration EQ is on. Acoustic Cal  
EQ is automatically set after the Auto Surround Setup  
has been completed.  
Press STANDBY/ON to switch the receiver on or into  
standby. The OFF / ON switch turns of the main  
power (you can’t switch on using the remote when it is in  
the OFF position).  
7
i.LINK indicator (page 85)  
Lights when an i.LINK-Audio-equipped component is  
3
STANDBY indicator  
selected.  
Lights when the receiver is in standby.  
8
MULTI ROOM indicator (page 83)  
4
Remote sensor  
Shows whether the multi-room function is active or not.  
Receives the signals from the remote control.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
9
Input indicators  
22 SP SYSTEM A/B (page 82)  
Shows the currently selected source component. The  
MULTI CH INPUT indicator lights when a component  
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT is selected. Nothing  
lights if an unassigned i.LINK-equipped component or  
USB connection is selected.  
Press repeatedly to select speaker system A,B, A/B or off  
(in that order). (See Using speaker system B on page 80  
for exceptions to this).  
23 SIGNAL SELECT (page 48)  
Press to select the type of input signal for the current  
source (DVD, DVR/VCR, etc.), and also to select the  
number of input channels for the USB and analog  
multichannel inputs.  
10 LISTENING MODE SELECTOR dial (page 43)  
Turn and push to select a listening mode.  
11 MASTER VOLUME dial  
Adjusts the volume.  
24 VIDEO SELECT (page 76)  
Press repeatedly to select the video source.  
12 Front panel controls  
To access the front panel controls, push gently on the  
lower third portion of the panel with your finger.  
25 TAPE 2 MONITOR (page 75)  
Press to monitor recordings on the device connected to  
the TAPE 2 MONITOR inputs/outputs as they are being  
made.  
26 STREAM DIRECT (page 47)  
Press to switch on/off Stream Direct.  
27 SETUP MIC jack  
Use to connect the supplied microphone.  
28 VIDEO INPUT jacks (page 25)  
DIGITAL IN – Connect a game console, portable DVD  
player, video camera (etc.), that has an optical digital  
connection.  
13 ACOUSTIC CAL. (page 48)  
Press to switch Acoustic Calibration EQ on or off.  
S-VIDEO – Connect a video camera (etc.), that has an  
S-video out.  
VIDEO / AUDIO (L/R) – Connect a video camera, etc.  
that has standard RCA video/audio outputs.  
14 MIDNIGHT (page 52)  
Press to switch MIDNIGHT mode on/off.  
15 TONE  
Press to switch between TONE ON and TONE BYPASS,  
which bypasses the tone controls.  
16 OPTION (–/+)  
Press OPTION repeatedly to select an option menu item,  
then use –/+ to adjust the settings.  
17 DIGITAL NR (page 53)  
Press to switch DIGITAL NR on/off.  
18 TUNER controls (page 55)  
Use the front panel tuner controls for recalling station  
presets.  
19 SB CH MODE (page 50)  
Use to select the surround/virtual back channel mode.  
20 MULTI ROOM & SOURCE controls  
If you’ve made multi-room connections (see Multi-room  
setup on page 83) use these controls to control the sub  
room from the main room (see Using the sub room  
controls on page 84).  
21 PHONES jack (page 46)  
Use to connect headphones (no sound will be heard  
through the speakers).  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
Display  
03  
1
2
3 4  
5
6
SIGNAL  
AUTO  
RF  
L
C
R
LS  
S
LFE  
RS  
DIGITAL  
OVER ATT  
DISC MTRX  
PRO LOGIC  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
TUNED STEREO MONO  
SP AB  
TAPE2  
Neo :6  
2ch PLAYBACK  
EON  
RDS  
RF ATT  
9
8 7  
1
SIGNAL indicators (page 75)  
– Lights during DTS-ES matrix processing.  
MTR  
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.  
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input  
signal automatically.  
PRO LOGIC  
– Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II and  
Pro Logic IIx processing.  
– Lights during Neo:6 processing with 2-  
channel sources.  
Neo :6  
2
Program format indicators  
These change according to which channels are active in  
Dolby, DTS, DVD-A and SACD sources.  
– Lights during two-channel  
2ch PLAYBACK  
playback.  
LS, S and RS will light at the same time to indicate  
6.1channel sources.  
7
Speaker indicators  
L – Left front channel  
Light to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B.  
C – Center channel  
8
TAPE 2 (page 75)  
R – Right front channel  
Lights when the TAPE 2 monitor is switched on.  
LS – Left surround channel  
S – Surround channel (mono)  
RS – Right surround channel  
LFE – Low frequency effects channel  
9
Tuner indicators  
STEREO (page 55)  
Lights when listening to a stereo FM broadcast in  
auto/stereo mode.  
3
((( )))  
TUNED  
Lights when an LFE signal is being input.  
Lights when tuned to a broadcast.  
4
Analog level indicators  
MONO (page 55)  
Lights when the tuner MPX mode is set to mono.  
OVER indicator  
Lights when an analog input signal is too high,  
risking distortion. Use the input attenuator to reduce  
the level.  
ATT indicator (page 76)  
Lights when the input attenuator is on.  
5
6
Character display  
Digital format indicators  
– Lights when a Dolby Digital signal is  
DIGITAL  
detected.  
– Lights when a DTS signal is detected.  
– Lights when one of the Home THX modes is  
selected.  
– Lights during Surround EX matrix processing.  
– Lights when a decoding DTS-ES audio.  
– Lights during DTS-ES discrete processing.  
DIS  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
Remote control  
03  
9
Contrast control  
Use to adjust the contrast of the LCD touch screen.  
10 VOLUME +/–  
Use to adjust the volume.  
6
07/24 PM 3: 55  
1
11 MUTE  
7
8
HOME  
1/3  
Press to mute all output. Press again (or adjust the  
volume using the MASTER VOLUME control) to restore  
the sound.  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT 1  
2
3
12 Servicing terminal  
For use by Pioneer service technicians.  
TV  
/ DVD  
DVR  
/ LD  
SAT  
9
2
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
Basic remote control displays  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
The remote control LCD touch screen has a number of  
displays from which you can control receiver functions,  
as well as control operations for other components. The  
basic menu screens are explained here.  
SETUP  
3
4
Home menu screens  
There are three Home menu screens, which can be  
navigated by using the touch panel ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/  
right) soft keys or INPUT 1, 2 or 3.  
ENTER  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
10  
MENU  
MUTE  
11  
12  
5
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
HOME  
1/3  
1
2
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
6
INPUT 1  
2
3
TV  
1
Date and time display  
See Setting the clock on page 10 to set this to the current  
DVD  
/ LD  
SAT  
/ DVD  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
time.  
CD  
TUNER  
2
LCD touch screen  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
7
8
3
4
5
OPERATION  
The LCD touch screen appears when the screen is  
touched or a button on the remote control is pressed.  
SETUP  
3
Cursor hard keys and ENTER  
Use to navigate menus and select options/execute  
commands.  
HOME  
2/3  
HOME  
3/3  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
4
CHANNEL +/–  
Use to select channels.  
1
INPUT  
2
3
1
2
INPUT  
3
CD-R  
/ TAPE1  
VCR2  
VCR3  
i.LINK  
USB  
PHONO  
5
MENU / SYSTEM SETUP  
Use to display the System Setup menu (or a menu when  
controlling other components, such as a DVD or TV).  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
VIDEO  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
6
SETUP  
SETUP  
Displays the rechargeable battery status. The recharge  
indicator ( ) shows when the remote is being  
recharged.  
1
RECEIVER  
Press to switch the receiver on or into standby.  
7
Press to switch the touch screen backlight on or off.  
8
Menu screen number  
Displays the screen number in the current menu, as well  
as the number of screens.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
2
INPUT 1 / 2 / 3  
3
Press 1, 2 or 3 to find the screen with the input source  
you want. After pressing the appropriate button to  
choose a source, you are taken to the corresponding  
function menu (see Operating menus for additional  
components below).  
Press to return to the main Home menu (see Home menu  
screens above).  
4
ꢀ/ꢁ (soft keys)  
Press to go to the previous/next receiver menu screen.  
5
STREAM DIRECT (page 47)  
3
TV CONT  
Press to select a Stream Direct mode.  
Press to access the TV control menu (see TV control menu  
screens below).  
6
ACOUSTIC CAL. (page 48)  
Press to select an acoustic calibration EQ setting.  
4
SETUP  
Press to access the remote control setup menu (see  
Setting up the remote control on page 9).  
7
Press to go to the previous screen (or set of screens).  
5
ꢀ/ꢁ (soft keys)  
Press to go to the previous/next Home menu screen.  
2/4  
RECEIVER  
6
RECEIVER  
TV  
CONT  
Press to go to the receiver main menu (see Receiver  
menu screens below).  
12  
13  
14  
RECEIVER  
8
MIDNIGHT DIGITAL NR  
TONE LOUDNESS  
7
SYSTEM OFF (page 72)  
Press to switch off all Pioneer components in your  
system, or any other component you have also  
programmed to switch off using the System Off function.  
9
10  
+
+
OPTION  
CH LEVEL  
11  
8
MULTI OPERATION (page 72)  
Use this button to perform multi operations.  
Receiver menu screens  
There are four receiver menu screens, which can be  
navigated by using the touch panel ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/  
right) soft keys.  
8
MIDNIGHT (page 52)  
Press to switch on/off Midnight listening.  
9
TONE (page 52)  
Press to switch the tone controls on/off.  
RECEIVER  
1/4  
10 OPTION (–/+)  
Press OPTION repeatedly to select an option menu item,  
then use –/+ to adjust the settings.  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
5
6
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
1
2
11 CH LEVEL (+/–) (page 60)  
Press CH LEVEL repeatedly to select a channel, then use  
–/+ to adjust the level.  
LISTENING  
MODE  
STEREO  
THX  
STANDARD  
12 TV CONT  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
Press to access the TV control menu (see TV control menu  
screens below).  
3
4
7
13 DIGITAL NR  
Press to switch digital noise reduction on/off (see  
Reducing noise during playback on page 53).  
1
SIGNAL SELECT (page 48)  
Press to select the type of input signal for the current  
source (DVD, DVR/VCR, etc.), and also to select the  
number of input channels for the USB and analog  
multichannel inputs.  
14 LOUDNESS (page 52)  
Press to switch Loudness on/off.  
2
LISTENING MODE selector (page 43)  
Use to select a listening mode.  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
23 Sub Room Control (page 84)  
Use this menu screen to control your sub room setup (if  
you’ve made multi-room connections). The source and  
INPUT buttons select input sources, and VOLUME (+/–)  
controls the sub room volume. Press MR&S ON/OFF to  
use the buttons on this screen in the sub room.  
3/4  
RECEIVER  
TV  
CONT  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
SPEAKER  
A/B  
INPUT  
ATT  
Remote control displays for the tuner  
The functions on these screens are used to control the  
tuner (see also Using the tuner on page 54).  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
DISPLAY  
DIMMER  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STATUS  
TUNER  
1/2  
TV  
CONT  
15 INPUT (page 41)  
Press repeatedly to cycle through all possible input  
sources.  
1
2
+
+
STATION  
TUNING  
CLASS  
16 SPEAKER A/B (page 82)  
3
4
Press repeatedly to select speaker system A,B, A/B or off  
(in that order). (See Using speaker system B on page 80  
for exceptions to this).  
BAND  
MPX  
8
5
6
7
9
10  
DISP MODE TUNER EDIT  
17 VIDEO SELECT (page 76)  
Press repeatedly to select the video source.  
18 TAPE 2 MONITOR (page 75)  
1
STATION + / – (page 55)  
Press to monitor recordings on the device connected to  
the TAPE 2 MONITOR inputs/outputs as they are being  
made.  
Press to select station presets.  
2
TUNING + / – (page 54)  
Use to select a listening mode.  
19 SB CH MODE (page 50)  
Use to select the surround/virtual back channel mode.  
3
CLASS (page 55)  
Press to switch between the three banks (classes) of  
station presets.  
20 INPUT ATT (page 76)  
Press to switch the input attenuator on/off.  
4
BAND (page 54)  
21 DISPLAY DIMMER (page 77)  
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.  
Press to switch between AM and FM radio bands.  
5
DISP MODE (page 56)  
22 STATUS (page 78)  
Press to check selected receiver settings.  
Press to switch between the frequency display and the  
station name display.  
6
4/4  
RECEIVER  
Press to return to the main Home menu (see Home menu  
screens above).  
23  
- Sub Room Control -  
MR&S  
ON/OFF  
7
ꢀ/ꢁ (soft keys)  
+
VOLUME  
Press to go to the previous/next receiver menu screen.  
DVD  
/LD  
TV  
CD  
SAT  
8
MPX (page 55)  
Press to listen to a radio broadcast in mono.  
DVR  
/VCR1  
CD-R  
/TAPE1  
9
TUNER EDIT (page 55)  
Press to memorize and name a station preset.  
TUNER  
INPUT  
10  
Press to go to the receiver main menu (see Receiver  
menu screens above).  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
3
INPUT  
Use to select the audio/video input source.  
4
TUNER  
2/2  
Press to return to the main Home menu (see Home menu  
screens above).  
TV  
CONT  
5
ꢀ/ꢁ (soft keys)  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Press to go to the previous/next TV control menu screen.  
11  
12  
6
SCREEN SIZE  
Use to select the screen size on your TV.  
0
7
CLR  
DIRECT  
ACCESS  
Press to clear an entry.  
8
CH ENTER  
Use to enter channel selections directly.  
CH RETURN  
11 Number buttons (page 56)  
Press to return to the channel last selected.  
Use to input a radio frequency.  
12 DIRECT ACCESS (page 55)  
After pressing, you can access a radio station directly  
using the number buttons.  
9
Press to go to the previous screen (or set of screens).  
2/4  
TV CONTROL  
Remote control displays for other  
components  
TV  
The functions on these screens are available once you’ve  
programmed the remote to control the appropriate  
component (for example, your TV or DVD player). See  
Using the remote control with other components on  
page 67 for more on this. These screens work in tandem  
with the remote control hard keys (see Remote control  
above).  
10  
11  
MPX  
DISPLAY  
SPLIT  
SELECT  
SWAP  
P in P  
IN 1  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 4  
TV control menu screens  
10 MPX  
1/4  
TV CONTROL  
TV  
Press to mute/restore the sound.  
SCREEN  
SIZE  
1
2
3
6
7
DISPLAY  
Press to change the display.  
1
2
5
8
3
6
9
CLR  
SPLIT  
4
Press to split the screen.  
7
0
SELECT  
Press to select items on-screen.  
CH  
ENTER  
CH  
RETURN  
INPUT  
8
9
P in P  
4
5
Use for picture-in-picture.  
SWAP  
Press to swap small and large pictures with P in P.  
1
TV  
Press to switch TV power on/off.  
2
Number buttons  
Use to select a channel directly.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
11 IN1 / IN2 / IN3 / IN4  
15 ANT / DTV / i.LINK  
Use to select the type of antenna, DTV, or i.LINK  
component you’ve connected to your TV.  
These are unassigned buttons which can be used to  
learn new commands. See Programming signals from  
other remote controls on page 69 for more on this.  
16 AV selection  
Press to select the programmed picture quality mode.  
17 BLU / GRN / RED / YEL  
Use to make selections from a DTV menu.  
3/4  
TV CONTROL  
TV  
18 SLEEP  
Press to set the TV sleep timer.  
DTV  
DTV  
12  
13  
ON/OFF  
MENU  
DTV  
GUIDE  
DTV  
INFO  
19 FREEZE  
Press to freeze the picture when using a plasma display.  
DTV  
AUDIO  
VIEW  
MODE  
CC  
RETURN  
Operating menus for additional components  
The example below shows the DVD menu screen.  
14  
DVD  
DVD  
1/2  
12 DTV controls  
DTV ON/OFF  
TV  
CONT  
1
2
3
6
7
Press to switch the digital TV on/off.  
DTV MENU  
Press to display the DTV menu.  
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
DTV GUIDE  
Press to access the digital TV guide.  
DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
DTV INFO  
4
5
Press to display the DTV information screen.  
13 DTV AUDIO  
1
DVD  
Press to switch between DTV audio options.  
Press to switch DVD power on/off.  
VIEW MODE  
Press to switch between view modes available.  
2
Playback buttons  
ꢆ ꢇ (backward/forward scan)  
Press and hold for fast backward/forward scanning  
CC  
Press to switch close-captioning on/off.  
(play)  
Press to start or resume playback.  
14 RETURN  
Press to return to the DTV main menu.  
ꢈ ꢉ (backward/forward skip)  
Press to jump back to the beginning of the  
current chapter or track, then to previous chapters.  
Press to jump to the next chapter or track.  
4/4  
TV CONTROL  
TV  
(stop)  
15  
16  
17  
18  
ANT  
DTV  
i.LINK  
Press to stop the disc (you can resume playback by  
pressing (play)).  
AV  
selection  
FREEZE  
RED  
19  
(pause)  
BLU  
GRN  
YEL  
Press to pause playback. Press again to restart.  
3
AUDIO  
SLEEP  
Press to select the audio channel or language.  
SUBTITLE  
Press to select a subtitle display.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
DISPLAY  
Press to display/change disc information shown on-  
screen.  
TOP MENU  
Press to display the top menu of a DVD disc.  
4
Press to return to the main Home menu (see Home menu  
screens above).  
5
ꢀ/ꢁ (soft keys)  
Press to go to the previous/next TV control menu screen.  
6
TV CONT  
Press to access the TV control menu (see TV control menu  
screens above).  
7
Press to go to the receiver main menu (see Receiver  
menu screens above).  
DVD  
DVD  
2/2  
TV  
CONT  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
CLR  
+10  
0
10  
11  
8
9
SEARCH  
MODE  
RETURN  
8
Number buttons  
Use to directly access tracks, chapters and titles.  
9
SEARCH MODE  
Use to access the search mode (to jump to a particular  
part of the disc).  
10 CLR  
Press to clear an entry.  
11 RETURN  
Press to return to a previous menu screen.  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Chapter 4  
Getting started  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Introduction to home theater  
If headphones are connected to the receiver, disconnect  
them.  
You are probably used to using stereo equipment to listen  
to music, but may not be used to home theater systems  
that give you many more options (such as surround  
sound) when listening to soundtracks.  
2
Connect the microphone to the SETUP MIC jack  
on the front panel.  
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers  
and the microphone.  
Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to  
create a surround sound effect, making you feel like  
you're in the middle of the action or concert. The  
surround sound you get from a home theater system  
depends not only on the speakers you have set up in your  
room, but also on the source and the sound settings of  
the receiver.  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
SBCH  
MODE  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
DVD-Video has become the basic source material for  
home theater due to its size, quality, and ease of use. The  
true multichannel audio possible using DVD is what  
creates a convincing surround sound effect and gives  
you the feeling of ‘being there’.  
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that  
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.  
Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a  
table or a chair.  
3
Using the remote control, press RECEIVER on the  
Follow the steps in Automatically setting up for surround  
sound below to achieve the best possible surround  
sound by calibrating this receiver to your listening area.  
touch screen, then press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
Automatically setting up for  
surround sound  
HOME  
1/3  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
2
3
The Auto Surround Setup measures the acoustic  
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account  
ambient noise, speaker size and distance, and tests for  
both channel delay and channel level. After you have set  
up the microphone provided with your system, the  
receiver uses the information from a series of test tones  
to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your  
particular room.  
TV  
DVD  
/ LD  
SAT  
/ DVD  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
OPERATION  
SETUP  
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a  
ENTER  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
source on page 41.  
MENU  
MUTE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
Important  
AV AMPLIFIER  
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not  
moved during the Auto Surround Setup.  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ/ꢁ hard keys and ENTER on the remote control  
to navigate through the screens and select menu items.  
• Using the Auto Surround Setup will overwrite any  
existing speaker settings in the receiver.  
• The ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) hard keys select menu  
items and the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys  
change the setting of the item selected.  
• After three minutes of inactivity during the Auto  
Surround Setup, the OSD will go to sleep until a  
button is pressed.  
Caution  
• The test tones used in the Auto Surround Setup are  
output at high volume.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
4
‘Auto Surround Setup’ should be highlighted.  
• Do not to turn down the volume during the test tones.  
This may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
Press ENTER.  
8
Confirm the speaker configuration in the OSD.  
System Setup  
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
actual speakers you have.  
[ Auto Surround Setup ]  
[1. Input Assign]  
[2. Surround Setup]  
[3. Expert Setup]  
[4. THX Audio Setup]  
Check!!  
FRONT [ YES  
CENTER [ YES  
SURROUND [ YES  
]
]
]
[Exit]  
X
SURR BACK [ YES 2]  
SUB WOOFER [ YES  
]
[OK,Go Next]  
[Retry]  
[ERR Fix SP.]  
[Return to Menu]  
5
Specify how you are using your speaker system.  
Highlight ‘Go Next’ then press ENTER.  
If you are using a normal surround setup, or if you’re not  
sure, leave the settings at their default:  
If the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct, use  
the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to select Retry, then  
press ENTER. Follow the instructions from step 6.  
Speaker System Select Normal Surround  
SP-B (speaker system B) – Second Zone  
X-Curve ON  
If the configuration is incorrect and you want to input the  
settings manually, select ERRFix SP then press  
ENTER. Use ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) to select the speaker  
then ꢃ/ꢄ (cursor left/right) to specify the size (and  
number for surround back). When you’re finished, go to  
the next step.  
For settings other than the default, see Speaker Systems  
on page 58.  
Auto Surround Setup  
Speaker System Select  
[
Normal Surround  
]
If you see an ERR message in the right side column, there  
may be a problem with the speaker connection. If  
selecting Retry (above) doesn’t fix the problem, turn off  
the power and check the speaker connections.  
SP–B  
[Second Zone]  
X–Curve  
[
ON  
]
[Go Next]  
[Return]  
9
Make sure ‘OK, Go Next’ is selected, then press  
6
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
ENTER.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker  
distance, and acoustic calibration EQ.  
Auto Surround Setup  
Connect microphone  
Please be quiet  
Move obstacles away  
If you have  
a
subwoofer  
turn power on and  
turn volume up  
Auto Surround Setup  
Auto Surround Setup  
[Start]  
[Cancel]  
•••  
Now Analyzing  
Surround Analysis  
Speaker Systems  
Speaker Distance  
Channel Level  
Please Wait  
[OK]  
[OK]  
[OK]  
[OK]  
• Make sure the microphone is connected.  
Caution!!  
Test tone is  
output loudly.  
[Cancel]  
Acoustic Cal EQ  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up  
the volume.  
[Cancel]  
• See below for notes regarding high background  
noise levels and other possible interference.  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
happening. It may take up to 6 minutes.  
7
Make sure ‘Start’ is selected, then press ENTER.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
it’s doing this.  
Auto Surround Setup  
Auto Surround Setup  
•••  
Now Analyzing  
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
[OK]  
[OK]  
[OK]  
Please Wait  
Speaker Level  
Caution!!  
Test tone is  
output loudly.  
[Cancel]  
[Cancel]  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
10 The Auto Surround Setup has finished! Press  
SYSTEM SETUP to exit the System Setup menu.  
Check that your DVD player/satellite receiver is  
set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2/96kHz PCM  
(2 channel) audio.  
Auto Surround Setup  
! ! Complete ! !  
If there is an option for MPEG audio, set this to convert  
the MPEG audio to PCM.  
If you connected the multichannel analog outputs of the  
player to this receiver, make sure that the player is set to  
output multichannel analog audio.  
[Data Copy]  
[Check]  
[Return]  
Note  
The settings made in the Auto Surround Setup should  
give you excellent surround sound from your system, but  
it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using  
the Surround Setup menu (starting on page 57).  
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs you  
may only be able to output analog and stereo digital  
audio. In this case you need to change the listening  
mode to SURROUND if you want multichannel  
surround sound.  
If you plan to go on and make advanced settings at this  
point, you can select Data Copy to start customizing  
your surround sound settings. See Acoustic Calibration  
EQ on page 61 for more on this.  
Playing a source  
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such  
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.  
You can also choose to view all the settings by selecting  
Check. See Checking your surround settings on page 66  
for more on this.  
1
Turn on the power of the playback component  
(for example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer  
(if you have one).  
If you selected Return, you can select Exit to leave the  
System Setup menu screen.  
• If your source is the TV’s built-in tuner, then switch to  
the channel you want to watch, otherwise make sure  
that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver. (For  
example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO  
1 jacks on your TV, make sure that VIDEO 1 input is  
now selected.)  
Note  
• If you select Cancel at any time during the Auto  
Surround Setup, the receiver automatically exits and  
no settings will be made.  
• Remember to disconnect the microphone after  
you’ve finished the Auto Surround Setup.  
2
If the receiver isn’t already on, press  
RECEIVER to switch it on.  
Other problems when using the Auto  
HOME  
1/3  
Surround Setup  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto  
Surround Setup (too much background noise, echo off  
the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the  
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check  
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,  
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch  
them off if necessary.  
INPUT  
1
2
3
TV  
DVD  
/ LD  
SAT  
/ DVD  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
OPERATION  
SETUP  
Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the  
microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off the  
TV when doing the Auto Surround Setup.  
Checking the settings on your DVD  
(or other) player  
Before continuing, you may want to check the digital  
audio output settings on your DVD player and digital  
satellite receiver.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
3
Change the receiver input to the source you  
want to play.  
You can use the front panel INPUT SELECTOR knob or  
the dedicated INPUT buttons on the remote control  
touch screen Home menu (see Basic remote control  
displays on page 33 if your unsure how to do this).  
HOME  
1/3  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
2
3
TV  
/ DVD  
DVD  
/ LD  
SAT  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
SETUP  
4
Start playback of the DVD (or other component).  
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound  
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are  
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the  
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.  
• See also Listening to your system on page 43 for  
more information on different ways of listening to  
sources.  
5
Use the MASTER VOLUME control (front panel or  
remote) to adjust the volume level.  
• Turn down the volume of your TV so that all the sound  
is coming from the speakers connected to this  
receiver.  
Note  
• If you need to manually switch the input signal type  
from digital to analog (stereo or multichannel), press  
SIGNAL SELECT on the front panel or from the  
remote control receiver menu (see also Using other  
functions on page 75).  
• For more detailed surround sound setup, see The  
Surround Setup menu on page 57.  
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur  
depending on your computer system. WMA9 Pro 7.1  
channel 96kHz sources will be downsampled to 5.1  
channel 48kHz. If sound problems occur please  
connect using the USB interface (see Using the USB  
interface on page 87).  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
Chapter 5  
Listening to your system  
About the listening modes  
Tip  
Using this receiver you can enjoy listening to sources,  
• In the steps below, you can also use the front panel  
analog or digital, in either stereo or surround sound.  
However, the listening mode options and the current  
active mode may change depending on your speaker  
setup and the type of source you’re listening to.  
LISTENING MODE SELECTOR dial instead of the  
remote control to select listening modes. Simply turn  
the dial to cycle through the available options,  
pressing forward to select a mode.  
While listening to a source, press STANDARD for  
Note  
surround sound playback.  
• The remote control operations in this section are  
accessed from the various receiver menus (for a  
more detailed explanation, see Receiver menu  
screens on page 34). To go to the receiver menu,  
RECEIVER  
1/4  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
press  
from the remote control Home menu  
RECEIVER  
(
) and use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) soft keys to  
LISTENING  
MODE  
STEREO  
THX  
go to the previous/next screen.  
STANDARD  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
HOME  
1/3  
RECEIVER  
1/4  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
INPUT  
1
2
3
With multichannel sources (such as DVDs and digital  
satellite broadcasts), the 2DIGITAL or DTS indicator on  
the front panel lights depending on the source format.  
Any active Advanced surround or Home THX mode is  
canceled.  
TV  
DVD  
/ LD  
SAT  
/ DVD  
LISTENING  
MODE  
STEREO  
THX  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
STANDARD  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
SETUP  
With two channel sources, press STANDARD repeatedly  
to select from:  
• You can’t select listening modes when the Stream  
Direct mode (see page 47) is switched on.  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to movie sources (the display shows  
5CH MOVIE+VSB with the VSB MODE switched on)  
• With the WMA9 Pro format, 2-channel sources can  
only be heard in stereo, and you can’t select the  
2Pro Logic IIx modes with multichannel sources.  
2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to music sources(the display shows  
5CH MUSIC+VSB with the VSB MODE switched on)  
Listening in surround sound  
2PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound with  
sound from the surround speakers in mono (the  
display shows 5CH SURR+VSB with the VSB MODE  
switched on)  
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in  
surround sound. However, the options available will  
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source  
you’re listening to.  
7 CH SURROUND is displayed instead of 2PRO  
LOGIC when the SB CH MODE is switched on  
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using  
the surround back channel on page 50.  
NEO:6 CINEMA – 6.1 channel sound, especially  
suited to movie sources  
See also Using the Advanced surround effects and Using  
the Home THX modes below for further stereo and  
surround playback options.  
NEO:6 MUSIC – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited  
to music sources  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
With multichannel sources, if you have connected  
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SB CH MODE  
ON, you can press STANDARD repeatedly to select:  
2
Use the (OPTION) +/– buttons to adjust the  
setting.  
Center Width is adjustable between 0 and 7 (default : 3);  
Dimension between –3 and +3 (default : 0); Panorama is  
On or Off (default : Off).  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above  
2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above  
3
Press OPTION again to adjust other settings.  
SX (Studio extension) – Adds surround back channel  
sound (taken from the left/right surround output) to  
5.1 channel sources  
Note  
EX (Extension decode) – Creates surround back  
channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides  
pure decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby  
Digital Surround EX and DTS-ES)  
• If the SB CH MODE is switched to OFF, 2Pro Logic  
IIx (above) becomes 2Pro Logic II (5.1 channel  
sound), however the above setting will still be  
effective.  
Note  
Neo:6 Music settings  
When listening in Neo:6 Music mode, you can adjust the  
center image to create a wider stereo effect with vocals.  
• If the SB CH MODE is switched to OFF, or the  
surround back speakers are set to NO, 2Pro Logic  
IIx (above) becomes 2Pro Logic II (5.1 channel  
sound).  
1
With NEO:6 MUSIC mode active, press OPTION  
repeatedly to select CENTER IMAGE.  
• In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same  
signal is heard from both surround back speakers.  
The remote control menu for this step is shown below  
(see note at the start of this chapter if you need help).  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music settings  
2/4  
RECEIVER  
When listening in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there  
are three further parameters you can adjust: Center  
Width, Dimension, and Panorama.  
TV  
RECEIVER  
CONT  
MIDNIGHT DIGITAL NR  
TONE LOUDNESS  
1
With ‘2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC’ mode active, press  
OPTION repeatedly to select CENTER WIDTH,  
DIMENSION or PANORAMA.  
The remote control menu for this step is shown below  
(see note at the start of this chapter if you need help).  
+
+
OPTION  
CH LEVEL  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
2/4  
RECEIVER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
TV  
CONT  
VIDEOINPUT  
RECEIVER  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
MIDNIGHT DIGITAL NR  
TONE LOUDNESS  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
2
Use the (OPTION) +/– buttons to adjust the  
+
+
OPTION  
setting.  
CH LEVEL  
Adjust the effect from 0 (no effect) to 10 (most  
prominence given to the center channel). The default  
setting is 3.  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
CENTER WIDTH – Makes the center channel wider  
(higher settings) or narrower (lower settings)  
DIMENSION – Makes the sound more distant (minus  
settings), or more forward (positive settings)  
PANORAMA – Creates more spacious surround  
sound  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
Adjusting the Advanced Surround effect level  
You can emphasize or reduce the effect of the Advanced  
Surround modes as you like. For each Advanced  
Surround mode you can set the effect level  
independently.  
Using the Advanced surround effects  
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety  
of additional surround sound effects. The Advanced  
Cinema modes are designed to be used with movies, and  
the Advanced Concert modes are for music.  
1
With one of the Advanced surround modes  
Press ADVANCED CINEMA or ADVANCED  
active, press OPTION repeatedly until EFFECT shows  
in the front panel display.  
CONCERT to select a listening mode.  
The remote control menu for this step is shown below  
(see note at the start of this chapter if you need help).  
RECEIVER  
1/4  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
2/4  
RECEIVER  
TV  
LISTENING  
MODE  
STEREO  
THX  
RECEIVER  
CONT  
STANDARD  
MIDNIGHT DIGITAL NR  
TONE LOUDNESS  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
+
+
OPTION  
CH LEVEL  
Press ADVANCED CINEMA repeatedly to select from:  
ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic  
soundtracks  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of  
special effects  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
MUSICAL – Creates a concert hall-type sound for  
musicals  
2
Use the (OPTION) +/– buttons to adjust the effect  
MONOFILM – Creates surround sound from mono  
soundtracks  
level.  
The effect level can be adjusted from 10 (min) to 90  
(max).  
5/7-D THEATER – Creates an extra wide stereo field  
Press ADVANCED CONCERT repeatedly to select from:  
CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound  
CHAMBER – Creates a space with alot of reverb  
JAZZ – Creates the sound of a small jazz club  
ROCK – Creates a live concert sound for rock music  
DANCE – Designed for music with lots of bass  
Using the Home THX modes  
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by  
THX, Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX  
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like  
what you hear in a cinema. See About THX® on page 109  
for more on this.  
Different THX options will be available depending on the  
source and the SB CH mode setting (see Using the  
surround back channel on page 50 for more on this).  
5/7CH STEREO – Allows you to hear stereo sources  
from all the speakers in your setup  
Press THX to select a THX listening mode.  
RECEIVER  
1/4  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
LISTENING  
MODE  
STEREO  
THX  
STANDARD  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
With two channel sources, press THX repeatedly to select  
a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode  
(see Listening in surround sound above for an  
explanation of each process):  
Listening in stereo  
You can hear any source through just the front left and  
right speakers (and possibly your subwoofer depending  
on your speaker settings).  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
2PRO LOGIC  
While listening to a source, press STEREO for  
stereo playback.  
NEO:6 CINEMA  
With multichannel sources, press THX repeatedly to  
RECEIVER  
1/4  
select from:  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
THX CINEMA – Gives you cinema-quality sound from  
your home theatre system using all the speakers in  
your setup  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
LISTENING  
MODE  
STEREO  
THX  
THX SURROUND EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1  
STANDARD  
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Allows you to hear 7.1  
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
(especially suited to movie sources)  
STEREO shows in the front panel display. Any active  
Advanced surround or Home THX mode is canceled.  
Dolby Digital and DTS multichannel sources are  
downmixed to stereo.  
THX ULTRA2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1  
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
THX MUSICMODE – Allows you to hear 7.1 channel  
playback with DVD-A and SACD multichannel music  
sources  
Listening with headphones  
When headphones are connected, only the STEREO  
(default) and PHONES SURROUND modes are available.  
PHONES SURROUND is a virtual surround sound  
experience for headphones which provides realistic and  
dynamic surround sound.  
Note  
• If you only have one surround back speaker  
connected, THX ULTRA2 CINEMA and THX  
MUSICMODE are not available.  
• When selecting the Dolby Pro Logic modes above,  
the display shows the mode you selected, then after  
a few seconds, shows THX CINEMA.  
When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening  
mode automatically changes to STEREO or PHONES  
SURROUND. When you disconnect them it reverts to the  
previous mode.  
• You won’t be able to use the THX options when  
playing two-channel DVD-A and SACD sources.  
With headphones connected, press STANDARD  
to select PHONES SURROUND, or STEREO for stereo  
sound.  
• With multichannel DVD-A and SACD sources, you  
can only select THX MUSICMODE.  
You can also turn the front panel LISTENING MODE  
SELECTOR dial to select either STEREO or PHONES  
SURROUND.  
Note  
• Many features of this receiver are not accessible  
when the headphones are connected.  
• If the U-shaped connectors (on the rear panel) aren’t  
in place, you won’t be able to use the headphones.  
• When headphones are connected, no sound is heard  
from the speakers.  
• If you’re listening to a WMA9 Pro format source, only  
STEREO is available.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
Using the multichannel analog inputs  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
If you’ve connected to the multichannel inputs on the  
rear panel (see Connecting the multichannel analog  
outputs on page 18), you will be able to select them as  
your input source. See Using the Stream Direct mode  
below if you want to bypass the signal processing in this  
receiver for a pure analog signal.  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
2
If you want to change the Stream Direct mode,  
press OPTION repeatedly to select Stream Direct  
(appears on the front panel as SD:1, 2 or 3) then use  
the (OPTION) +/– buttons to adjust the setting.  
SD:1 NORMAL – Analog and digital sources are  
heard according to the settings made in the  
Surround Setup (speaker setting, channel level,  
speaker distance, acoustic calibration EQ, and X-  
curve), as well as with dual mono, the input  
1
Press ‘Multi-ch in’ on the remote control Home  
menu ( ) screen.  
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front  
panel.  
HOME  
2/3  
attenuator, and any sound delay and hi-bit/hi-  
sampling settings. You will hear sources according to  
the number of channels in the signal.  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
1
INPUT  
2
3
CD-R  
/ TAPE1  
VCR2  
VCR3  
SD:2 2CHDIRECT – Use this setting for stereo  
analog and digital sources. All processing  
unnecessary for 2-channel signals is bypassed (such  
as speaker distance and acoustic calibration EQ) and  
you will hear the source through the shortest  
possible signal path. All sound will be heard through  
the front left and right speakers only (no subwoofer  
output is heard). With multichannel sources,  
playback is the same as the NORMAL setting  
(above).  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
VIDEO  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
SETUP  
2
If necessary, press SIGNAL SELECT to choose the  
number of channels you’ll hear.  
See Selecting USB and multichannel analog input  
channels on page 49 for more on this.  
SD:3 ANADIRECT – All analog sources are heard  
without any digital processing. All processing is done  
through the analog circuitry and the center channel,  
if present, will be sent to the front right and left  
speakers (the channel level is adjusted  
automatically). With digital sources, playback is the  
same as the NORMAL setting (above).  
Note  
• The number of channels you hear will depend on the  
source and the SB CH mode setting (see Using the  
surround back channel on page 50 for more on this).  
Using the Stream Direct mode  
Note  
• Default setting: SD:1 NORMAL (on)  
• You can’t use Digital NR, Midnight/Loudness  
listening, the SB CH mode, the tone control, or any of  
the listening modes when Stream Direct is on.  
Use the Stream Direct mode when you want to hear the  
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary  
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the  
pure analog or digital sound source.  
• If you connect the headphones when SD:3  
ANADIRECT is selected, only the front left and  
right channels will be heard with multichannel  
sources.  
1
While listening to a source, press STREAM  
DIRECT to switch on or off.  
• Stereo formats with surround sound information  
(such as Dolby Surround) are treated the same as  
multichannel sources.  
RECEIVER  
1/4  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
• When the speaker impedance is set to 4in  
Switching the speaker impedance on page 78, or  
when the Digital Safety is switched on (see  
Troubleshooting section on Power on page 99), the  
setting is fixed at SD:1 NORMAL.  
LISTENING  
MODE  
STEREO  
THX  
STANDARD  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
Press SIGNAL SELECT to select the type of input  
Listening with Acoustic Calibration  
EQ  
signal for the current source.  
With the remote, you may need to press  
on the  
RECEIVER  
You can listen to sources using the Acoustic Calibration  
Equalization set in Automatically setting up for surround  
sound on page 39 or Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 61.  
Refer to these pages for more on acoustic calibration  
equalization.  
Home menu ( ) first before reaching the receiver menu  
screen shown below (use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right)  
soft keys to go to the previous/next menu screen).  
While listening to a source, press ACOUSTIC CAL.  
RECEIVER  
1/4  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
to select an Acoustic Calibration EQ setting.  
RECEIVER  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
RECEIVER  
1/4  
LISTENING  
MODE  
STEREO  
THX  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
STANDARD  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
LISTENING  
MODE  
STEREO  
THX  
STANDARD  
ADVANCED  
CINEMA  
ADVANCED  
CONCERT  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
Press repeatedly to choose between:  
ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.  
– Selects an i.LINK signal.  
DIGITALIN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
Press repeatedly to select between:  
DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.  
ALL CH ADJ – No special weighting is given to any  
2RF – Selects a 2RF signal.  
one channel.  
AUTO – This is the default setting. The receiver  
selects the first available signal in the following  
FRONT CH ALIGN – All speakers are heard in  
accordance with the front speaker settings.  
order: ; 2RF; DIGITAL; ANALOG.  
CUSTOM 1/2 – Custom settings  
OFF – Switches Acoustic Calibration EQ off.  
Note  
• If no digital inputs (including the 2RF input) are  
assigned for the current source, the input signal type  
will default to ANALOG.  
Selecting the input signal type  
Most of the audio inputs have both analog and digital  
jacks. You can select the type of signal to be used in each  
case.  
• When using DIGITAL IN terminals the following  
digital signal formats are supported: Dolby Digital,  
DTS and PCM (32, 44.1, 48, 88.2 and 96 kHz sampling  
frequencies). If you are using the i.LINK connectors,  
DVD-A (including 176.4/192 kHz) and SACD are also  
supported. If your source is not supported, select  
ANALOG.  
The input signal type for the current input is indicated in  
the display. With digital signals, the signal type (Dolby  
Digital or DTS) also shows in the display.  
The default AUTO setting is usually sufficient, letting the  
receiver decide the most suitable signal type. However, if  
you want to record from the DVR/VCR1 IN/OUT jacks,  
then you should set the input signal type to analog.  
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For  
more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied  
with your DVD player.  
If you have selected the USB interface or the  
multichannel analog inputs as your input source, see  
Selecting USB and multichannel analog input channels  
below.  
• Even when i.LINK is selected and the i.LINK indicator  
lights, you won’t hear any sound if the output settings  
of your i.LINK device are off.  
• The audio signal from karaoke microphones and  
some LDs is not output from the digital outputs.  
Select ANALOG to listen to these formats.  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
• If you want to play DTS-encoded sources, you need to  
have digital connections. If ANALOG is selected,  
you’ll hear digital noise through your speakers.  
Select the STEREO or STANDARD listening mode  
and switch off any other sound processing features.  
These features include:  
• Make sure you connect your DVD/LD or LD players  
using the 2RF jack. If your player has a 2RF  
output this will ensure you can use all LDs. Refer to  
Connecting other video sources on page 21.  
• Real Phantom (page 51)  
• Virtual Surround Back (page 51)  
• Midnight/Loudness (page 52)  
• Digital Noise Reduction (page 53)  
• Dynamic Range Control (page 94)  
• The input signal for unassigned i.LINK-equipped  
components is fixed to . See Assigning the i.LINK  
inputs on page 91.  
Note that you’ll still be able to use the tone control (see  
Using the tone control on page 52).  
Selecting USB and multichannel analog input  
channels  
Note  
When you’ve selected the USB interface or the  
multichannel analog inputs as your input source, the  
SIGNAL SELECT button is used to specify the number of  
input channels.  
• You will see the sampling frequency in the display  
(with DTS 96kHz (24-bit) sources, 96 is only displayed  
when the signal is being processed at 96kHz).  
• Even if your DVD player can’t output 96kHz (24-bit)  
digital signals, you can still listen to DTS 96/24  
sources processed at 96kHz if it has a DTS output  
feature. Other formats (such as PCM192/96kHz  
sources) are not compatible unless the digital output  
of your DVD player supports high-sampling digital  
signals.  
After selecting USB or MULTI CH IN as your input  
source, press SIGNAL SELECT to choose the number  
of input channels.  
Select one of the following options:  
2 CHANNEL  
6 CHANNEL  
7 CHANNEL  
8 CHANNEL  
The 8 CHANNEL setting is the default.  
Listening to high-sampling formats  
This receiver supports 88.2/96kHz (24-bit) digital formats  
(such as DTS 96/24 and PCM 96kHz sources up to 24-bit)  
when connected to a compatible DVD player with digital  
connections. If you have connected this receiver to an  
i.LINK-equipped component, 176.4/192kHz (24-bit) digital  
formats (such as DVD-A and SACDs) are also supported.  
You can listen to these formats without downsampling in  
one of three ways:  
Switch the Stream Direct mode on.  
See Using the Stream Direct mode on page 47.  
For the following options, the 2Pro Logic modes cannot  
be selected for DTS 96kHz (24-bit) sources without  
downsampling:  
Select one of the Home THX modes.  
See Using the Home THX modes on page 45.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
material may sound better in the 5.1 format for which it  
was originally encoded, in which case you can simply  
switch the surround back channel off. The table below  
indicates when you will hear the surround back channel  
when playing various kinds of sources. (ì=Sound plays  
through surround back channel speaker(s); = 7 CH  
SURROUND shows in the display; = Home THX is  
selected and two surround back speakers are connected)  
Using the surround back channel  
• Default setting: SB CH ON  
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1  
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby  
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use  
6.1 or 7.1 decoding with other sources (for example, 5.1  
encoded material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a  
surround back channel will be generated, but the  
Standard / THX  
SB CH  
mode  
Advanced  
surround  
Stereo sources  
Type of source  
Multichannel  
sources  
2Pro Logic II x 2Pro Logic  
NEO:6  
Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES encoded  
multichannel source with 6.1ch  
surround  
ON  
AUTO  
ON  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Dolby Digital/DTS encoded  
multichannel source  
AUTO  
ì
Dolby Digital/DTS encoded stereo  
source; other digital stereo source  
ON  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
AUTO  
ON  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Analog 2-channel (stereo) source  
AUTO  
ì
ì
ì
Press SB CH MODE repeatedly to cycle through  
SB CH OFF – Surround back channel is switched off  
the surround back channel options.  
The remote control menu for this step is shown below  
(see note at the start of this chapter if you need help).  
Note  
• You will only hear the surround back channel when  
you’ve selected SPA as the speaker setting (see  
Switching the speaker system on page 80). Changing  
the speaker system may automatically change this  
setting (see notes below).  
RECEIVER  
3/4  
TV  
CONT  
RECEIVER  
SB CH  
MODE  
INPUT  
• If the surround back speaker is set to NO in Speaker  
Systems on page 58, or you have selected SPA+B  
as the speaker setting, you can only use the virtual  
surround back effect (see next page).  
SPEAKER  
A/B  
INPUT  
ATT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
DISPLAY  
DIMMER  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STATUS  
• You can’t select the surround back channel setting (it  
is automatically switched off) when you’ve selected  
SPB as the speaker setting or when Bi-Surround is  
selected in Speaker Systems on page 58.  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
• You can’t use the surround back channel setting  
when Stream Direct is on or when the STEREO mode  
is selected.  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
• When the THX mode is selected, you can’t select SB  
CH OFF if you’re listening to DVD-Audio or SACD.  
Each press changes the setting as follows (see the table  
above for an explanation of each):  
SB CH AUTO – Automatically switches to 6.1 or 7.1  
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example,  
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)  
SB CH ON – 6.1 or 7.1 encoding is always used (for  
example, on 5.1 encoded material)  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
Listening with virtual surround back  
Creating a center speaker effect  
If you don’t have a center speaker connected, the center  
speaker channel is mixed to your two front speakers.  
However, using the Real Phantom setting, you can create  
a center speaker effect for an effective front surround  
effect.  
speakers  
• Default setting: VIRTUAL SB OFF  
If you don’t have real surround back speakers connected,  
you can use the Virtual Surround Back feature to  
simulate one.  
1
Press OPTION repeatedly to select R.PHANTOM.  
Sometimes the material may sound better in the 5.1  
format for which it was originally encoded. In this case  
you can have the receiver only apply this effect to 6.1  
encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES (VSB  
AUTO), or you can simply switch it off (VSB OFF).  
The remote control menu for this step is shown below  
(see note at the start of this chapter if you need help).  
2/4  
RECEIVER  
TV  
Note that this feature only works when the surround  
channels are active and the surround back speaker is set  
to NO in Speaker Systems on page 58. It is also available  
when the speaker system has been set to SPAB (see  
Switching the speaker system on page 80).  
RECEIVER  
CONT  
MIDNIGHT DIGITAL NR  
TONE LOUDNESS  
+
+
OPTION  
See also Using the surround back channel above.  
CH LEVEL  
Press SB CH MODE repeatedly to cycle through  
the virtual surround back channel options.  
The remote control menu for this step is shown below  
(see note at the start of this chapter if you need help).  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
RECEIVER  
3/4  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
TV  
CONT  
RECEIVER  
SB CH  
MODE  
INPUT  
2
Use the (OPTION) +/– buttons to change the  
setting.  
SPEAKER  
A/B  
INPUT  
ATT  
Mid – A subtle center speaker effect is applied to the  
front left and right channels.  
VIDEO  
DISPLAY  
DIMMER  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STATUS  
Max – A strong center speaker effect is applied to the  
front left and right channels.  
OFF – The center speaker effect is switched off.  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
Note  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
• Real Phantom is automatically switched off and  
R.PHANTOM won’t appear in the display (in step 1) if  
Stream Direct or the STEREO listening mode is  
switched on. The center speaker must also be set to  
NO in Speaker Systems on page 58.  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
VSB AUTO  
VSB ON  
VSB OFF  
Note  
• You can’t select the virtual surround back setting  
when you’ve selected SPB as the speaker setting  
(see Using speaker system B on page 80) or when Bi-  
Surround is selected in Speaker Systems on page 58.  
• You can’t use the virtual surround back setting when  
Stream Direct is on or when STEREO, or one of the  
THX modes is selected.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
Using Hi-bit and Hi-sampling  
Note  
You can use both Hi-bit and Hi-sampling to create a wider  
dynamic range with digital sources like CDs or DVDs.  
• You can’t use the Midnight and Loudness modes at  
the same time.  
1
Press OPTION repeatedly to select HI-BIT or HI-  
• You can’t use either of these modes when using the  
tone controls, or Stream Direct or the Home THX  
modes.  
SAMPLING.  
The remote control menu for this step is shown below  
(see note at the start of this chapter if you need help).  
• Midnight and Loudness automatically adjust  
according to the volume at which you’re listening.  
However, the volume must be under -20dB for these  
features to take effect.  
2/4  
RECEIVER  
TV  
CONT  
RECEIVER  
MIDNIGHT DIGITAL NR  
TONE LOUDNESS  
Using the tone control  
You can use the tone control to make customized  
settings for the bass and treble.  
+
+
OPTION  
CH LEVEL  
Switching the tone control on or off  
• Default setting: BYPASS  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
You’ll need to switch the tone control on to adjust the  
bass and treble below.  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
Press TONE to switch the tone control on or off.  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
When the tone control is switched off, BYPASS shows in  
the display. The remote control menu for this step is  
shown below (see note at the start of this chapter if you  
need help).  
2
Use the (OPTION) +/– buttons to switch the  
selected mode on or off.  
Note  
2/4  
RECEIVER  
TV  
RECEIVER  
• Hi-bit and Hi-sampling may not work with Stream  
Direct or analog sources.  
CONT  
MIDNIGHT DIGITAL NR  
TONE LOUDNESS  
• You can’t use Hi-bit with SACD or sources over  
88.2kHz when using one of the digital inputs  
(including i.LINK).  
+
+
OPTION  
CH LEVEL  
Using Midnight and Loudness  
listening  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
• Default setting: Off  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels.  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
The Loudness feature is useful for listening to music  
sources at low volumes.  
Press MIDNIGHT or LOUDNESS to switch the  
Note  
effect on or off.  
• You can’t use the tone control with Stream Direct,  
Midnight, Loudness, or any of the Home THX modes.  
LOUDNESS is only available when using the remote  
control. The remote menu for this step is shown below  
(see note at the start of this chapter if you need help).  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
Adjusting the bass and treble  
Listening to dual mono soundtracks  
• Default setting: Bass: 0, Treble: 0  
You can specify how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital  
soundtracks should be played. Dual mono is not widely  
used, but is sometimes necessary when two languages  
need to be sent to separate channels.  
You can adjust the bass and treble controls separately to  
adjust the overall tone.  
1
Press OPTION repeatedly to select BASS or  
1
Press OPTION repeatedly to select DUAL MONO.  
TREBLE.  
The remote control menu for this step is shown below  
The remote control menu for this step is shown below  
(see note at the start of this chapter if you need help).  
(see note at the start of this chapter if you need help).  
2/4  
RECEIVER  
2/4  
RECEIVER  
TV  
CONT  
TV  
CONT  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
MIDNIGHT DIGITAL NR  
TONE LOUDNESS  
MIDNIGHT DIGITAL NR  
TONE LOUDNESS  
+
+
OPTION  
+
+
OPTION  
CH LEVEL  
CH LEVEL  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
DIGITALIN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
2
Use the (OPTION) +/– buttons to change the  
2
Use the (OPTION) +/– buttons to adjust the  
sound.  
The bass and treble can be adjusted from –6 to +6.  
setting.  
CH1 – Only channel 1 is played  
CH2 – Only channel 2 is played  
3
Press ENTER to confirm.  
CH1/CH2 – Both channels are played through the  
front speakers  
Reducing noise during playback  
If you have a noisy source (for example, cassette or video  
tape with lots of background noise), you may be able to  
improve the quality of the sound by switching on digital  
noise reduction (DIGITAL NR).  
Note  
• On the CH1 and CH2 settings the sound comes only  
from the center speaker (or from the front speakers if  
NO was selected for the center speaker setting).  
Press the DIGITAL NR button to switch digital  
• This setting works only with dual mono encoded  
Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks.  
noise reduction on or off.  
The remote control menu for this step is shown below  
(see note at the start of this chapter if you need help).  
• When listening to a dual mono source, the L and R  
indicators on the front panel flash. The channel you  
select will light in the display.  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
Note  
• Depending on the source, there may not be a  
noticeable improvement in the quality of the sound.  
• You can’t use digital noise reduction with Stream  
Direct or the Home THX modes.  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the tuner  
06  
Chapter 6  
Using the tuner  
Finding a station  
Note  
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and  
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and  
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the  
exact frequency of the station you want to listen to, see  
Tuning directly to a station below. Once you are tuned to  
a station you can memorize the frequency for recall  
later—see Memorizing station presets on page 55 for  
more on how to do this.  
• The remote control operations in this section are  
accessed from the remote control tuner menus. If  
you’re not sure how to navigate the touch panel, see  
Basic remote control displays on page 33. To go to the  
tuner menu, press TUNER on the remote control  
Home menu ( ):  
HOME  
1/3  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
TUNER  
1/2  
TV  
CONT  
INPUT  
1
2
3
TV  
DVD  
/ LD  
SAT  
+
+
STATION  
TUNING  
CLASS  
/ DVD  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
BAND  
MPX  
SETUP  
DISP MODE TUNER EDIT  
TUNER  
1/2  
TV  
CONT  
TUNER  
2/2  
1
Press BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if  
TV  
CONT  
necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.  
+
+
STATION  
TUNING  
CLASS  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
2
Tune to a station using the TUNING +/– buttons.  
0
BAND  
MPX  
Automatic tuning  
DIRECT  
ACCESS  
To search for stations in the currently selected band,  
press and hold either of the TUNING +/– buttons for  
about a second. The receiver will start searching for  
the next station, stopping when it has found one.  
Repeat this step to search for other stations.  
DISP MODE TUNER EDIT  
Manual tuning  
To change the frequency one step at a time, press the  
TUNING +/– buttons repeatedly.  
High speed tuning  
Press and hold the TUNING +/– buttons for high speed  
tuning, releasing the button once you reach the  
frequency you want.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the tuner  
06  
MPX mode  
Tuning directly to a station  
If there is interference or noise during a stereo FM radio  
broadcast (the STEREO indicator is lit), or the radio  
reception is weak, press MPX on the tuner touch screen  
menu to switch the receiver into mono reception mode  
(the MONO indicator lights). This should improve the  
sound quality and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.  
Sometimes, you'll already know the frequency of the  
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply  
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on  
the remote control.  
TUNER  
1/2  
TV  
CONT  
TUNER  
1/2  
+
+
STATION  
TUNING  
CLASS  
TV  
CONT  
+
+
STATION  
TUNING  
CLASS  
BAND  
MPX  
DISP MODE TUNER EDIT  
BAND  
MPX  
DISP MODE TUNER EDIT  
1
On the tuner touch screen menu, press BAND to  
change the band (FM or AM), if necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.  
Memorizing station presets  
2
Press DIRECT ACCESS.  
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it's  
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for  
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.  
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. The  
receiver can memorize up to 30 stations, stored in three  
banks, or classes, (A, B and C) of 10 stations each. When  
memorizing FM frequencies, the receiver also stores the  
MPX setting (see MPX mode above).  
TUNER  
2/2  
TV  
CONT  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
0
DIRECT  
ACCESS  
TUNER  
1/2  
TV  
CONT  
+
+
STATION  
TUNING  
CLASS  
3
Use the number buttons to enter the frequency  
of the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.  
BAND  
MPX  
DISP MODE TUNER EDIT  
Note  
• If you make a mistake while inputting the frequency,  
press the DIRECT ACCESS button again to cancel the  
frequency and start again.  
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.  
See Finding a station on page 54 and Tuning directly to a  
station above for more details on how to do this.  
2
Press TUNER EDIT.  
The display shows MEMORY INPUT then a blinking  
memory class (A, B or C).  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the three classes.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through the three memory  
classes, A, B and C.  
4
Use the STATION +/– buttons (or number  
buttons) to select the station preset you want.  
Press STATION +/– repeatedly to select a preset  
number.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the tuner  
06  
5
6
While the display is blinking, press ENTER.  
Listening to memorized station presets  
You can do this from both the remote control and the  
front panel.  
Repeat steps 1 – 5 to memorize up to 30 stations.  
Naming station presets  
TUNER  
1/2  
TV  
CONT  
You can input a name of up to eight characters for each  
preset station in the receiver’s memory. For example, you  
could input New Jazz for that station and when you  
listen to it the name, rather than the frequency, will  
appear in the display.  
+
+
STATION  
TUNING  
CLASS  
BAND  
MPX  
1
Press CLASS repeatedly to select the class.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through the three memory  
DISP MODE TUNER EDIT  
classes, A, B and C.  
2
Use the STATION +/– buttons to select an FM or  
AM preset station.  
1
Press CLASS to select the class in which the  
station is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through the three memory  
classes, A, B and C.  
3
Press TUNER EDIT to select the station name  
mode (NAME INPUT).  
4
Edit the name as necessary and press ENTER.  
2
Use the STATION +/– buttons to select the station  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) hard keys to change the  
character and the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys to  
move forward/back a position. The name can be up to  
eight characters (the possible characters are listed  
below).  
memory in which the station is stored.  
You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
control to recall the station preset.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
!”#$%&’()*+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]  
Any time you want to exit the process, press the TUNER  
EDIT button.  
5
Press ENTER when you’re done.  
6
Repeat steps 2 – 5 to memorize up to 30 preset  
broadcast station names.  
Tip  
• To change a station name, just enter the new name  
over the top of the old one. To erase a station name,  
enter a new name of eight spaces.  
• You can switch between the frequency display and  
the station name display using the DISP MODE  
button.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Surround Setup menu  
07  
Chapter 7  
The Surround Setup menu  
2
Using the remote control, press RECEIVER on the  
Making receiver settings from the  
Surround Setup menu  
touch screen, then press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to  
optimize the surround sound performance. You only  
need to make these settings once (unless you change the  
placement of your current speaker system or add new  
speakers.).  
HOME  
1/3  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
2
3
These settings are designed to fine-tune your system, but  
if you’re satisfied with the settings made in Introduction  
to home theater on page 39, it isn’t necessary to make all  
of these settings.  
TV  
DVD  
/ LD  
SAT  
/ DVD  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
SETUP  
Important  
• For many of the settings below, you’ll have to connect  
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it  
about ear level at your normal listening position. See  
Introduction to home theater on page 39 if you’re  
unsure how to do this. Also see Other problems when  
using the Auto Surround Setup on page 41 for notes  
regarding high background noise levels and other  
possible interference.  
ENTER  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
MUTE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
AV AMPLIFIER  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ/ꢁ hard keys and ENTER on the remote control  
to navigate through the screens and select menu items.  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up  
the volume to the middle position.  
• The ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) hard keys select menu  
items and the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys  
change the setting of the item selected.  
• After three minutes of inactivity during the Auto  
setup options (including Professional Acoustic  
Calibration EQ measurement), the OSD will go to  
sleep until a button is pressed. With other screens,  
the receiver automatically exits and no settings will  
be made.  
3
Select ‘Surround Setup’ then press ENTER.  
System Setup  
[Auto Surround Setup]  
[1. Input Assign ]  
Caution  
[2. Surround Setup ]  
[3. Expert Setup ]  
[4. THX Audio Setup ]  
• The test tones used in the Surround Setup are output  
at high volume (the volume increases to 0db  
automatically).  
[Exit]  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
adjust these settings in order:  
If headphones are connected to the receiver, disconnect  
them.  
2.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Level ]  
[ 3.Speaker Distance ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal EQ ]  
[ 5.X-Curve ]  
[Return]  
Speaker Systems – Specify the size and number of  
speakers you’ve connected (page 58).  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Surround Setup menu  
07  
Channel Level – Adjust the overall balance of your  
3
Specify how your speakers are configured.  
speaker system (page 60).  
2.1.Speaker Systems  
Manual Free  
Speaker Distance – Specify the distance of your  
speakers from the listening position (page 61).  
Speaker System Select  
[Normal Surround ]  
Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjust overall equalization  
depending on your room characteristics (page 61).  
_
Second Zone  
SP B:  
[
]
X-Curve – Adjust the amount of ‘re-equalization’  
necessary to achieve a flat frequency response from  
your home theater system (page 65).  
[
Next]  
Use ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) to cycle through the  
5
Make the adjustments necessary for each  
following options:  
setting, pressing ENTER to confirm after each screen.  
When you’re finished, you can check through your  
settings screen by screen by selecting Check from the  
Surround Setup menu (see Checking your surround  
settings on page 66 for more on this).  
Normal Surround – Select for normal home theater  
use.  
Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-  
amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your front  
speakers on page 81).  
Bi-Surround – Select if you’re using two sets of  
surround speakers (see Adding a second set of  
surround speakers for Bi-Surround on page 82).  
Speaker Systems  
You need to specify the number of speakers you have in  
your system, and how you want to route the sound. It is a  
good idea to make sure that the settings made in  
Introduction to home theater on page 39 are correct.  
If you selected Normal Surround, you’ll also have to  
select the speaker system B setting:  
1
Select ‘Speaker Systems’ then press ENTER.  
2.1.Speaker Systems  
Manual Free  
Speaker System Select  
2.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
[Normal Surround ]  
_
Second Zone  
SP B:  
[
]
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Level ]  
[ 3.Speaker Distance ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal EQ ]  
[ 5.X-Curve ]  
[
Next]  
[Return]  
Second Zone – Select if you want to hear speaker  
system B in a separate room.  
2
Select how you want to set up your speakers  
ITU-R – Select this setting to use two switchable  
main speaker systems using speaker system B (see  
Alternating surround speaker setups using speaker  
system B (ITU-R) on page 80).  
then press ENTER.  
2.1. Speaker Systems  
[Manual Free]  
[Manual THX]  
(all small)  
[Auto]  
OFF – Select if no speakers are connected to the B  
terminals.  
[Return]  
4
Press ENTER to go to the next screen.  
• If you selected Auto in step 2, you will have to select  
Next and then press ENTER to continue to the auto  
(test tone) setup.  
Manual Free – Manually set all speakers.  
Select Start and press ENTER to start the test tones  
when you’ve made sure the room is free of ambient noise.  
Go to step 8 when you see OK appear on the OSD.  
Manual THX – All speakers are set to SMALL. You  
can only select the number of surround back  
speakers.  
Auto – All speakers are set automatically. (The  
microphone must be hooked up to the front panel to  
do this.)  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Surround Setup menu  
07  
5
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set  
• If you select SMALL for the front speakers the  
subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also,  
the center and surround speakers can’t be set to  
LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this  
case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.  
then select a speaker size.  
2.1. Speaker Systems  
Manual Free  
Normal Surround  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
[
[
[
LARGE  
LARGE  
LARGE  
]
]
]
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround  
back speakers will automatically be set to NO.  
X
SURR BACK [LARGE 2]  
SUB WOOFER [ YES  
NEXT)  
]
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make  
sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround  
back terminal.  
(
Use ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) to select the size (and  
6
7
Press ENTER to go to the next screen.  
number) of each of the following speakers:  
Choose a crossover frequency.  
FRONT – Select LARGE if your front speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you  
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send  
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.  
This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds  
playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or  
the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those  
selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will  
be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.  
CENTER – Select LARGE if your center speaker  
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center  
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to  
the front speakers).  
2.1. Speaker Systems  
Manual Free  
Normal Surround  
Crossover [ 80Hz ]  
Normal Surround  
(THX Speaker = 80Hz)  
SURROUND – Select LARGE if your surround  
speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively.  
Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect  
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the  
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a  
subwoofer).  
SP-B : Second Zone  
[Return]  
Use ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) to select the crossover  
frequency:  
50Hz – Sends bass frequencies below 50 Hz to the  
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).  
SURR BACK – Select the number of surround back  
speakers you have (one, two or none). Select LARGE  
if your surround back speakers reproduce bass  
frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass  
frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If  
you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose  
NO.  
80Hz – Sends bass frequencies below 80 Hz to the  
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).  
100Hz – Sends bass frequencies below 100 Hz to the  
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).  
150Hz – Sends bass frequencies below 150 Hz to the  
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).  
SUBWOOFER – LFE signals and bass frequencies of  
channels set to SMALL are output from the  
subwoofer when YES is selected (see notes below).  
Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to  
output bass sound continuously or you want deeper  
bass (the bass frequencies that would normally come  
out the front and center speakers are also routed to  
the subwoofer). If you did not connect a subwoofer  
choose NO (the bass frequencies are output from  
other speakers).  
200Hz – Sends bass frequencies below 200 Hz to the  
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).  
Note  
• If you selected Manual THX (in step 2) the crossover  
frequency is set to 80Hz and this screen doesn’t  
appear.  
8
Select ‘Return’ and press ENTER to return to the  
Surround Setup menu.  
Note  
• If you selected Manual THX (in step 2) you can only  
adjust the surround back settings.  
Tip  
• If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may  
seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers  
and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not, however,  
yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker  
placement of your room you may actually experience  
• If you selected Front Bi-Amp (in step 3) you can’t  
adjust the surround back settings.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Surround Setup menu  
07  
a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency  
cancellations. In this case, try changing the position  
or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results,  
listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and  
YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL  
alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds  
best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is  
to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by  
selecting SMALL for the front speakers.  
3
If you selected ‘Manual’ or ‘Semi Auto’, adjust  
the level of each channel using the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/  
right) hard keys.  
If you selected Manual, use ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) to  
switch speakers. The Semi Auto setup will output test  
tones in the order shown on-screen:  
2.2. Channel Level  
Semi Auto  
LEFT  
CENTER  
RIGHT  
SURROUND R  
SURR BACK R  
SURR BACK L  
SURROUND L  
SUB WOOFER  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
+1. 5dB  
+1. 5dB  
+2. 0dB  
-3. 5dB  
-1. 5dB  
+3. 0dB  
+2. 0dB  
Channel Level  
+10. 0dB  
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the  
overall balance of your speaker system, an important  
factor when setting up a home theater system. If you’re  
unsure of the best channel level settings, simply select  
Auto from the setup options below.  
Return = Push Enter  
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is  
emitted.  
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ then press ENTER.  
Note  
2.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
• If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter,  
take the readings from your main listening position  
and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-  
weighting/slow reading).  
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Level ]  
[ 3.Speaker Distance ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal EQ ]  
[ 5.X-Curve ]  
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You  
may need to adjust the level after testing with an  
actual soundtrack.  
[Return]  
2
Select a setup option and press ENTER to start  
4
If you selected ‘Manual’ or ‘Auto’, select ‘Return’  
the test tones.  
then press ENTER to finish. With ‘Semi Auto’, simply  
press ENTER.  
2.2. Channel Level  
[Manual]  
[Semi Auto]  
[Auto]  
Normal Surround  
[Return]  
With the Auto setup, !! Complete !! is displayed on-  
screen after the channel levels are set.  
2.2. Channel Level  
Your Speaker Systems  
” Normal Surround ”  
[Manual]  
[Semi Auto]  
[Auto]  
Normal Surround  
[Return]  
Manual – Move the test tone manually from speaker  
to speaker and adjust individual channel levels.  
Your Speaker Systems  
” Normal Surround ”  
Semi Auto – Adjust channel levels as the test tone  
moves from speaker to speaker automatically.  
To check the settings, select Check and press ENTER  
instead of selecting Return above. When you’re finished  
select Return then press ENTER.  
Auto – The levels are set automatically by the  
receiver as it outputs the test tones. (For this setup  
you must have the mic connected.)  
Tip  
• You can change the channel levels at any time by  
using CHANNEL +/– on the front panel or from the  
remote control receiver menu (see Basic remote  
control displays on page 33 for more on this). You can  
set separate levels for each listening mode  
(Standard/Home THX, Advanced Cinema/Advanced  
Concert and Stereo) as well as for SB CH ON.  
However, these settings will be cleared if you use the  
Surround Setup or Auto Surround Sound Setup to set  
the channel levels at a later date.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Surround Setup menu  
07  
5
Select ‘Return’ then press ENTER to finish.  
Speaker Distance  
For good sound depth and separation from your system,  
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from  
the listening position. The receiver can then add the  
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.  
Tip  
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround  
back speakers are the same distance.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ then press ENTER.  
Acoustic Calibration EQ  
2.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room  
equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It  
works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your  
room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that  
can color the original source material. You can also make  
these settings manually to get a frequency balance that  
suits your tastes. A more advanced setup is also  
available, where you can make detailed settings  
according to your room’s reverb characteristics (see  
Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 63). You  
should have the mic connected when using any of the  
setup options.  
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Level ]  
[ 3.Speaker Distance ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal EQ ]  
[ 5.X-Curve ]  
[Return]  
2
Choose a unit of measurement and press ENTER.  
Speaker distance can be expressed in either feet or  
meters.  
2.3. Speaker Distance  
Unit  
feet  
[Manual]  
[Auto]  
[Return]  
Setting the Acoustic Calibration EQ automatically  
Your Speaker Systems  
Normal Surround  
1
Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ then press ENTER.  
2.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
3
Select a setup option and press ENTER.  
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Level ]  
[ 3.Speaker Distance ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal EQ ]  
[ 5.X-Curve ]  
2.3. Speaker Distance  
[Manual]  
[Auto]  
[Return]  
[Return]  
2
Select ‘Auto’ then press ENTER.  
Your Speaker Systems  
Normal Surround  
2. 4. Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Data Copy]  
[Manual]  
CUSTOM1 , CUSTOM2  
[Auto]  
ALL ADJ & FRONT ALIGN  
Manual – Select each speaker in turn and adjust the  
distance manually.  
Auto – The speaker distances are set automatically  
by the receiver as it outputs test tones. (For this setup  
you must have the mic connected.)  
[Professional]  
[Return]  
4
If you selected ‘Auto’, select ‘Start’ and press  
As the receiver outputs test tones, the frequency balance  
is adjusted automatically for the following settings:  
ENTER. If you selected ‘Manual’, adjust the distance  
of each speaker using the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right)  
hard keys.  
Using the Manual setup, you can adjust the distance of  
each speaker in 0.2 feet (0.05 meter) increments.  
ALL CH ADJ – All the speakers are set individually so  
no special weighting is given to any one channel.  
FRONT CH ALIGN – All speakers are set in  
accordance with the front speaker settings.  
With the Auto setup, !! Complete !! is displayed on-  
screen after the speaker distances are set. If you want to  
check the settings, select Check and press ENTER.  
!! Complete !! is displayed on-screen after the acoustic  
calibration equalization is set. If you want to check the  
settings, select Check and press ENTER.  
3
Select ‘Return’ then press ENTER to finish.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Surround Setup menu  
07  
Setting the Acoustic Calibration EQ manually  
Before manually adjusting the Acoustic Calibration EQ,  
we recommend copying the ALL CH ADJ or the FRONT  
CH ALIGN settings from the Auto setup above (or from  
Introduction to home theater on page 39) to one of the  
custom settings. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will  
give you a reference point from which to start (see  
Copying your Acoustic Calibration EQ settings below for  
how to do this).  
Tip  
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too  
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the  
speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or  
lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM  
feature. Use (cursor right) to move to the far right  
side of the OSD, then use ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) to  
raise or lower the channel level for the current  
speaker.  
1
2
3
4
Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ then press ENTER.  
5
When you’re done, press (cursor down) to  
2.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
select ‘Return’ then press ENTER to finish.  
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Level ]  
[ 3.Speaker Distance ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal EQ ]  
[ 5.X-Curve ]  
Note  
• If the message OVER !! appears on-screen, it means  
the frequency curve may result in distortion from the  
speaker. Adjust the frequency curve accordingly.  
[Return]  
Select ‘Manual’ then press ENTER.  
Copying your Acoustic Calibration EQ settings  
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration  
EQ (see Setting the Acoustic Calibration EQ manually  
above), we recommend copying the ALL CH ADJ or the  
FRONT CH ALIGN settings from the Auto setup above  
(or from Introduction to home theater on page 39) to one  
of the custom settings. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this  
will give you a reference point from which to start.  
2. 4. Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Data Copy]  
[Manual]  
CUSTOM1 , CUSTOM2  
[Auto]  
ALL ADJ & FRONT ALIGN  
[Professional]  
[Return]  
Select CUSTOM1 or CUSTOM2 then press ENTER.  
1
Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ then press ENTER.  
2.4. Acoustic Cal EQ  
Manual  
2.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
[ CUSTOM1 ]  
A[ CUSTOM2 ]  
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Level ]  
[ 3.Speaker Distance ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal EQ ]  
[ 5.X-Curve ]  
[Return]  
[Return]  
Select the channel you want, adjust the  
2
Select ‘Data Copy’ then press ENTER.  
frequency curve to your liking, then move to the  
next speaker.  
2. 4. Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Data Copy]  
[Manual]  
CUSTOM1 , CUSTOM2  
[Auto]  
ALL ADJ & FRONT ALIGN  
2.4. Acoustic Cal EQ  
Manual  
Target Curve : CUSTOM1  
Channel [L•SMALL]  
[Professional]  
[Return]  
TRIM  
[Return]  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys to select the  
channel, then ENTER to select it.  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys to select the  
frequency and ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) to boost or cut the  
EQ. When you’re finished, press ENTER to move to the  
next channel.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Surround Setup menu  
07  
3
Select CUSTOM1 or CUSTOM2 then use the ꢀ/ꢁ  
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how  
your room is responding to certain frequencies.  
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are  
taken into account automatically (compensation is  
provided for comparison purposes), but the frequency  
measurements are always shown without the  
equalization performed by this receiver.  
(cursor left/right) hard keys to select the setting you  
want to copy.  
2.4. Acoustic Cal EQ  
Manual  
2.4. Acoustic Cal EQ  
A.Cal EQ Data Copy  
To  
CUSTOM1  
CUSTOM2  
From  
[ ALL ADJ ]  
[CUSTOM2 ]  
[ CUSTOM1 ]  
A[ CUSTOM2 ]  
Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower  
frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher  
frequencies (this is most obvious when comparing the  
frequencies at 0ms). This initial slope is not a problem  
(i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.  
[Copy OK]  
[Cancel]  
[Return]  
• You can also copy from one custom setting to  
another. For more on the ALL CH ADJ and FRONT CH  
ALIGN settings, see Setting the Acoustic Calibration  
EQ automatically above.  
Setting Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
according to your room characteristics  
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at  
which the frequency response is analyzed for calibration.  
You can pinpoint the time that is best for calibration of  
the system for your particular room characteristics. The  
graph below shows the difference between standard  
acoustic calibration and professional calibration (the  
gray circles represent the point at which the microphone  
captures the sound for frequency analysis).  
4
Select ‘Copy OK’ and press ENTER to confirm.  
You will be taken to the Acoustic Calibration EQ settings  
menu. Select Return then press ENTER to go back to the  
Surround Setup menu.  
Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room  
reverberation by calibrating your system based on the  
direct sound coming from the speakers. It can also  
provide you with a graphical output of the frequency  
response of your room.  
Level  
Test tone  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro  
calibration range  
Standard Acoustic Cal.  
EQ calibration range  
Note  
Time  
(in msec.)  
• Before setting up with Professional Acoustic  
Calibration EQ, you should finish calibrating using  
the Auto Surround Setup on page 39.  
0
80  
160  
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it  
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,  
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner  
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the  
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of 20–40ms  
to compensate for two major factors that will influence  
the sound of most rooms:  
How to use Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant  
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that  
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb  
characteristics, use the auto pro setup to calibrate the  
room automatically. This should provide a more balanced  
calibration than simply using the standard Acoustic  
Calibration EQ. The manual setup allows you to  
customize your system calibration with the help of a  
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or  
using a computer (with software available from  
Pioneer—see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC  
output on page 88 for more on this).  
Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –  
Depending on your room, you may find that lower  
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to  
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).  
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the  
measurement is done too late.  
Low  
frequencies  
Level  
High  
frequencies  
How to interpret the graphical output  
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time  
(in milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line  
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a  
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when  
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually  
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this  
usually takes about 100ms or so).  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro  
calibration range  
Standard Acoustic Cal.  
EQ calibration range  
Time  
(in msec.)  
0
80  
160  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Surround Setup menu  
07  
Reverb characteristics for different channels –  
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for  
each channel. Since this difference increases as the  
sound is influenced by the various room  
characteristics, it is often better to capture a  
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of  
channel frequencies/sounds.  
Auto Pro. – The receiver automatically sets an early  
time period (20–40 ms or 60–80 ms) for reverb  
measurement, giving you a system calibration based  
on the direct sound coming from the speakers. The  
frequency balance for each channel is then adjusted  
to minimize the effect of the room characteristics on  
the overall sound.  
Manual Pro. – You can set an early time period for  
reverb measurement manually, giving you the  
flexibility to choose the direct sound calibration that  
works best with your listening area. After you have  
made this setting, the frequency balance for each  
channel is adjusted automatically, calibrating your  
system according to your custom setting.  
Left  
surround  
Level  
Right  
Surround  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro  
calibration range  
Standard Acoustic Cal.  
EQ calibration range  
Time  
(in msec.)  
0
80  
160  
4
If you selected ‘Auto Pro.’, select ‘Start’ and press  
ENTER.  
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often  
not necessary to make a 20–40ms setting. Later time  
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience  
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what  
works best for your particular room.  
2.4. Acoustic Cal EQ Pro.  
Auto Pro  
Connect microphone  
Please be quiet  
Move obstacles away  
If you have  
a
subwoofer  
turn power on and  
turn volume up  
Note that changing the room (for example, moving  
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.  
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.  
[Start]  
[Cancel]  
!! Complete !! is displayed on-screen after the acoustic  
calibration equalization is set. Select Return to return to  
the professional acoustic calibration equalization menu.  
Using Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
1
2
3
Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ then press ENTER.  
5
Select a manual setup option and press ENTER.  
2.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
2.4. Acoustic Cal EQ Pro.  
Manual Pro.  
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Level ]  
[ 3.Speaker Distance ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal EQ ]  
[ 5.X-Curve ]  
[ Reverb Measurement ]  
[ Reverb View ]  
[Return]  
[ Advanced EQ Setup ]  
[Return]  
Select ‘Professional’ then press ENTER.  
Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the  
reverb characteristics of your room for separate  
channels in select frequency ranges.  
2. 4. Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Data Copy]  
[Manual]  
CUSTOM1 , CUSTOM2  
[Auto]  
ALL ADJ & FRONT ALIGN  
Reverb View (Normal) – You can check the reverb  
measurements made for specified frequency ranges  
in each channel. PC Output will also show as an  
option after you’ve completed the reverb  
measurement. See Connecting a PC for Advanced  
MCACC output on page 88 for more on this option.  
[Professional]  
[Return]  
Select a setup option and press ENTER.  
Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time  
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and  
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of  
your listening area. Note that using this setup will  
alter the settings you made in Automatically setting  
up for surround sound on page 39.  
2.4. Acoustic Cal EQ Pro.  
Professional  
[Auto Pro. ]  
Acou. Cal EQ Setup  
[Manual Pro. ]al Surround  
Reverb Measurement  
Reverb View  
Advanced EQ Setup  
[Return]  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Surround Setup menu  
07  
6
If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select  
You can switch between your connected speakers  
(excluding the subwoofer), and display the  
‘Start’ and press ENTER.  
measurements for the following frequencies: 63Hz, 125  
Hz, 250Hz, 500Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz, 4kHz, 8kHz and 16kHz.  
2.4. Acoustic Cal EQ Pro.  
Reverb  
Connect microphone  
Select the setting from the following time periods (in  
milliseconds): 0–20ms, 10–30ms, 20–40ms, 30–50ms,  
40–60ms, 50–70ms and 60–80ms. This setting will be  
applied to all channels during calibration.  
Please be quiet  
Move obstacles away  
If you have  
a
subwoofer  
turn power on and  
turn volume up  
[Start]  
[Cancel]  
When you’re finished, select Go. It will take about 2–11  
minutes for the calibration to finish.  
!! Complete !! is displayed on screen when the reverb  
measurement is finished (this may take 2–6 minutes).  
You can select Reverb View (above) to see the results  
on-screen. See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC  
output on page 88 for more on setting up your computer  
for the graphical output.  
!! Complete !! is displayed on-screen after the acoustic  
calibration equalization is set. If you want to check the  
settings, select Check and press ENTER.  
X-Curve  
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright  
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting  
acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater  
listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie  
soundtracks.  
7
If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can use the  
cursor buttons (hard keys) to check the reverb  
characteristics for each channel. Select ‘Return’ and  
press ENTER when you’re done.  
1
Select ‘X-Curve’ then press ENTER.  
2.4. Acoustic Cal EQ Pro.  
Reverb View  
[
[ 500Hz ]  
C
]
dB  
2. Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
[ 1. Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2. Channel Level ]  
[ 3. Speaker Distance ]  
[ 4. Acoustic Cal EQ ]  
[ 5. X-Curve ]  
0
80  
[Return]  
160ms  
[ Return ]  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) buttons to select the  
channel and the frequency you want to check. Use the  
ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to go back and forth  
between the two. Note that the markers on the vertical  
axis indicate decibels in 2dB steps.  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys to  
switch the X-Curve ON or OFF.  
2. 5. X-Curve  
8
If you selected ‘Advanced EQ Setup’, input the  
X-Curve  
[
]
ON  
time setting you want to use for calibration, then  
select ‘Go’. Select ‘Start’ from the next screen.  
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can  
manually choose the time period that will be used for the  
final frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though  
you can make this setting without reverb measurement,  
it is best to use the measurement results as a reference  
for your time setting. For an optimal system calibration  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we  
recommend using the 20–40ms setting.  
[ Manual ]  
[ Semi Auto ]  
[ Return ]  
Your X-Curve  
"
–0.5dB/oct  
"
If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and you  
won’t be able to adjust the X-Curve.  
3
Select a setup option and press ENTER.  
2. 5. X-Curve  
2.4. Acoustic Cal EQ Pro.  
X-Curve  
[
]
ON  
dB  
[
[ 500Hz ]  
C
]
[ Manual ]  
[ Semi Auto ]  
[ Return ]  
0
80  
160ms  
[20~40ms]  
Your X-Curve  
"
–0.5dB/oct  
"
[Go]  
[Return]  
Manual – Adjust the X-Curve manually.  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) buttons to select the  
channel, frequency, and time setting. Use the ꢂ/ꢃ  
(cursor up/down) buttons to switch between them.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Surround Setup menu  
07  
Semi Auto – The X-Curve is calculated automatically.  
The larger your listening area (as determined by the  
speaker distance setting), the greater the X-Curve  
slope (see the following step for more on this).  
4
Check the X-Curve setting. If you selected  
‘Manual’, make any adjustments necessary to the X-  
Curve.  
2.5. X-Curve Manual  
X-Curve  
[ –2.0dB/oct ]  
[ Return ]  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys to adjust the  
setting. The X-Curve is expressed as a downwards slope  
in decibels per octave, starting at 2kHz. The sound  
becomes less bright as the slope increases (to a  
maximum of -3.0dB/oct). Use the following guidelines to  
set the X-Curve according to your room size:  
Room size (m2)  
48  
72  
36  
60  
300 1000  
X-Curve (dB/oct) –0.5  
–1  
–1.5  
–2  
–2.5 –3  
5
Select ‘Return’ then press ENTER to finish.  
Note  
• Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied  
when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see  
Using the Home THX modes on page 45).  
Checking your surround settings  
You can check through the receiver settings screen by  
screen after you’re finished using the Surround Setup.  
1
Select ‘Check’ from the Surround Setup menu  
and press ENTER.  
2.Surround Setup  
[ Check ]  
[ 1.Speaker Systems ]  
[ 2.Channel Level ]  
[ 3.Speaker Distance ]  
[ 4.Acoustic Cal EQ ]  
[ 5.X-Curve ]  
[Return]  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys to  
cycle through the settings screen by screen.  
These appear in the same order as the Surround Setup  
menu. Select Return then press ENTER to go back to the  
Surround Setup menu.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling other equipment  
08  
CChaoptnert8rolling other equipment  
Using the remote control with other  
components  
Recalling preset codes  
The following steps show you how to recall preset codes  
for each input source. Use the remote control touch  
screen to do this.  
The supplied remote control can operate not only this  
receiver, but also your TV, DVD player and other  
components. If the component is listed in the remote  
control's memory, simply follow the steps in Recalling  
preset codes below. If the component is not listed, or if  
you want the remote to learn additional operations, see  
Programming signals from other remote controls on  
page 69.  
1
Make sure the component you want to control is  
switched on.  
2 Press PRESET RECALL on the remote setup menu.  
SETUP  
1/3  
CALIBRATE  
Note  
PRESET RECALL  
LEARNING  
• The remote control operations in this section are  
accessed from the remote setup menu. To go to the  
remote setup menu, press  
MULTI OPERATION  
DIRECT FUNCTION  
SETUP  
from the remote  
control Home menu ( ):  
HOME  
1/3  
SETUP  
1/3  
3
From the ‘Select Function’ screen, choose the  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
CALIBRATE  
input function which matches the connection for the  
component you want to control.  
For example, press DVD/LD if you want to control the  
INPUT  
1
2
3
PRESET RECALL  
LEARNING  
TV  
/ DVD  
DVR  
/ LD  
SAT  
DVD player that you connected to the DVD/LD terminals.  
DVR  
CD  
TUNER  
/ VCR1  
MULTI OPERATION  
DIRECT FUNCTION  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
Select Function  
PRESET RECALL  
SETUP  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
• For more on navigating the remote control menu  
screens, see Basic remote control displays on  
page 33. See also TV control menu screens on page 36  
and Operating menus for additional components on  
page 37.  
CANCEL  
• When using a TV, it is often best to use the TV/DVD  
input for the TV source, and TV CONT for the TV  
screen or monitor.  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to scroll  
through the component options.  
• You can select any button, but choosing a button  
that’s already assigned will overwrite the old preset  
(and any other operations you may have  
programmed).  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling other equipment  
08  
4
From the ‘Replacing Device’ screen choose the  
7
Point the remote at the component and press  
type of component that you’ve connected.  
In this example, we’re setting the remote to control a  
DVD player, so we’ll select DVD.  
TRY to test if you've set it up properly.  
If the component you are trying to control turns on/off,  
the setup for this component is complete and you can go  
to step 8.  
Replacing Device  
PRESET RECALL  
Following Setting?  
PRESET RECALL  
DVD  
TV  
device : DVD  
maker :  
Pioneer  
DVD recorder  
type :  
Pioneer-1  
INSTALL  
BACK  
TRY  
CANCEL  
CANCEL  
• It is best to have the input source button (DVD/LD)  
match the component.  
If the component doesn’t respond, it’s possible that:  
• Your component manufacturer has several preset  
codes for the same component. Press BACK to go  
back and select another number (if there is one) from  
the list.  
5
From the ‘Setting Makers’ screen, select the  
name of the company that makes your component.  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to scroll through  
the available manufacturers. Here we’ll select PIONEER  
as an example.  
• Your component doesn't have a standby mode (and  
therefore won’t switch on/off).  
Setting Makers  
• There is something blocking the path between the  
remote control and the remote sensor of the  
component you’re trying to control.  
PRESET RECALL  
Pioneer  
AKAI  
• The preset code is unavailable for your component.  
Press CANCEL to exit, then try using the method  
described in Programming signals from other remote  
controls below to program the component into the  
remote control. If your component type is different  
from the set of controls associated with the input  
source (for example you want to control an LD with  
the DVD/LD button), it is useful to choose INSTALL  
in the next step to change the screen to control the  
component you’ve connected.  
DENON  
BACK  
CANCEL  
6
Select a setting type.  
There may be only one option listed, or there may be  
several. Start with the first button available, which will  
show the makers name and 1 (in this case Pioneer-1).  
8
Press INSTALL to confirm and go back to the  
‘Select Function’ screen to control another  
component.  
Setting Type  
PRESET RECALL  
Following Setting?  
Pioneer-1  
Pioneer-2  
PRESET RECALL  
device : DVD  
maker :  
Pioneer  
type :  
Pioneer-1  
PLEASE WAIT  
BACK  
CANCEL  
INSTALL  
BACK  
TRY  
CANCEL  
From the Select Function screen (step 3), you can press  
to exit and return to the remote control Home menu  
screen.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling other equipment  
08  
To exit without saving the preset you have assigned,  
press CANCEL instead of INSTALL above.  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to scroll  
through the component options (the RECEIVER and  
TUNER screens are not available).  
3
On the touch screen, press the button that  
Tip  
corresponds to the command you want to teach the  
remote control.  
For example, choose the (play) button to program this  
• Pioneer DVD recorders fall into the following setting  
types:  
Pioneer-1 – DVR-7000  
remote control to start playback on your DVD player.  
Pioneer-24 – DVR-310, DVR-510H  
Pioneer-5 – DVR-57H, DVR-810H  
END  
END  
LEARN  
DVD  
LEARN  
DVD  
1/2  
2/2  
TV  
TV  
If you have more than one Pioneer DVD recorder of  
setting type 24, you can select different setting types  
for each (allowing for separate control).  
DVD  
DVD  
CONT  
CONT  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
CLR  
+10  
0
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
Programming signals from other  
remote controls  
SEARCH  
MODE  
DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
RETURN  
If the preset code for your component is not available, or  
the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you  
can program signals from the remote control of another  
component. This can also be used to program additional  
operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after  
assigning a preset code in Recalling preset codes above.  
A remote icon shows in the top right corner of the touch  
screen after you’ve selected a button (you can deselect it  
by pressing it again).  
• Remote control soft keys such as  
,
, ꢀ/ꢁ  
1
Press LEARNING on the remote setup menu.  
(cursor left/right) and TV CONT are used to select  
menu screens (even in learning mode), so therefore  
cannot be programmed.  
SETUP  
1/3  
• The Learnand Lbuttons that appear on some  
component screens are unassigned buttons which  
can be used to learn new commands. See Editing  
remote control button names on page 70 to change  
the name once you’ve programmed a command.  
CALIBRATE  
PRESET RECALL  
LEARNING  
MULTI OPERATION  
DIRECT FUNCTION  
• You can program the remote control hard keys  
(VOLUME +/– and MUTE are only available with TV  
CONTROL), but the command will remain the same  
for all screens of the component selected.  
• Press END to go back without making any changes.  
2
From the ‘Select Function’ screen, choose the  
input function which matches the connection for the  
component you want to control.  
For example, press DVD/LD if you want to program  
signals for the DVD player that you connected to the  
DVD/LD terminals.  
4
While the icon is displayed, point the two  
remote controls toward each other and press the  
button on the other remote control corresponding  
to the operation you want to program.  
Select Function  
LEARNING  
12 – 30 cm  
(5–12 inches)  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
When the command has been learned, OK! shows on  
the remote control touch screen and the remote control  
returns to the command learning screen (step 3). Repeat  
steps 3 and 4 to program additional commands.  
CANCEL  
If you want to learn signals for additional components,  
press END to go back to the Select Function screen and  
start again from step 2.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling other equipment  
08  
2
Choose the setting of an input by pressing the  
Note  
ON/OFF button on the touch screen.  
Each press switches between ON and OFF.  
• If you see Failed (or OK! doesn’t appear) on the  
touch panel, or OK! is displayed, but you find that the  
command wasn't learned, try teaching the command  
again, but vary the distance (closer or farther)  
between the remote controls. Some signals may be  
stronger than others and require more distance (a  
projector’s remote signal, for example).  
DIRECT FUNCTION  
DVD/LD : ON  
TV/DVD : ON  
SAT : ON  
• There may be certain remote signals that can’t be  
programmed correctly.  
OK  
• The remote control has a limited memory. If you see  
Memory Full appear in the display, use the PRESET  
RECALL feature in Recalling preset codes on page 67  
to overwrite any programmed buttons that you aren’t  
using. This will free up memory to program additional  
remote signals.  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to scroll  
through the component options.  
3
Press OK to confirm the settings.  
Remote Direct function  
• Default setting: All inputs – ON  
Editing remote control button names  
You can rename the buttons on the remote control menu  
screens for different input sources (such as DVD/LD or  
SAT). You may want to do this if you taught the remote  
control a new command in Programming signals from  
other remote controls above, but the command doesn’t  
correspond with the button name.  
On the default setting, when you press an input select  
button (DVD/LD, DVR/VCR1, etc.), both the receiver  
input source and the remote control change to the  
selected function.  
When an input select button is set to OFF, pressing that  
button changes the function of the remote control only.  
This can be useful when you want to operate one  
component without interrupting playback of another.  
1
Press KEY LABEL on the remote setup menu.  
1
Press DIRECT FUNCTION on the remote setup  
SETUP  
2/3  
menu.  
CLOCK DISPLAY : AM/PM  
CLOCK SETTING  
BEEP :  
SETUP  
1/3  
CALIBRATE  
TIMEOUT  
PRESET RECALL  
LEARNING  
KEY LABEL  
MULTI OPERATION  
DIRECT FUNCTION  
2
From the ‘Select Function’ screen, select the input  
source menu that contains the button you want to  
rename.  
For example, press DVD/LD if you taught the DVD/LD  
remote screen a new command from your DVD player.  
Select Function  
KEY LABEL  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
CANCEL  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling other equipment  
08  
3
Select the button you want to rename.  
5
Edit the button as necessary.  
For example, choose the SEARCH MODE button if it was  
programmed with the ‘eject’ command from your DVD  
player’s remote.  
If you selected the text input method:  
DVD/LD  
KEY LABEL  
END  
KEY LABEL  
DVD  
A
J
B
K
T
C
L
D
M
V
E
N
F
O
X
G
P
Y
H
Q
I
TV  
CONT  
DVD  
R
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
CLR  
S
U
W
Z
+10  
0
SPACE  
CLEAR  
OK  
SEARCH  
MODE  
RETURN  
• Use the letter and number buttons to spell out the  
name you want.  
• Remote control soft keys such as  
,
, ꢀ/ꢁ  
• Press SPACE to add a space in the name.  
• Press CLEAR to delete characters one at a time.  
• Press (small text only) to go to the next line.  
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) soft keys to go  
forward/back a screen.  
(cursor left/right) and TV CONT are used to select  
menu screens (even in learning mode), so therefore  
cannot be renamed.  
• Press END to go back without making any changes.  
4
Choose how you want to change the look of the  
button.  
If you selected the graphic input method:  
DVD / LD  
DVD / LD  
KEY LABEL  
KEY LABEL  
SEARCH  
MODE  
SELECT LABEL TYPE  
TEXT : LARGE  
TEXT : SMALL  
GRAPHIC  
CLEAR  
OK  
• Use the icon buttons to select a graphic.  
Select one of the following options:  
• Press CLEAR to return to the original button  
appearance.  
TEXT : LARGE – Select this if you want to input a  
short name, such as EJECT.  
• Press  
to go back without editing the button.  
TEXT : SMALL – Select this if the name is fairly long,  
for example, DVD Tray Eject.  
6
Press OK when you’ve finished.  
PLEASE WAIT shows in the remote display while the  
name or graphic is input and you’ll return to step 3.  
GRAPHIC – Select this if you want to replace the  
button name with an icon, such as .  
Note  
• With power buttons, you won’t be able to delete the  
’ graphic. These buttons are best left for switching  
the component on or off.  
• After confirming, you won’t be able to return to the  
original button appearance without resetting the  
remote control (as described on page 11).  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling other equipment  
08  
If you are programming a shutdown (system off)  
sequence, select RECEIVER from the end of the list.  
Multi Operation and System Off  
The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a  
series of commands for the components in your system.  
For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on your DVD  
player and start playing the loaded DVD using only two  
buttons on the remote control.  
Select Function  
MULTI OPERATION  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use  
one button to stop and switch off a series of components  
in your system at the same time.  
CANCEL  
Note  
• Before Multi Operation and System Off will work  
correctly, you must setup the remote to work with  
your TV and other components (see Recalling preset  
codes on page 67 and Programming signals from  
other remote controls on page 69 for more on this).  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to scroll  
through the component options.  
3
Press ‘Add’ to choose an operation in the  
sequence.  
• Power on and off commands only work with  
components that have a standby mode.  
If this is the first command in the sequence, the  
operation you’re adding will be placed at the top.  
Otherwise, the command will simply take the next place  
in the sequence.  
Programming a multi operation or a  
shutdown sequence  
DVD/LD  
1
Press MULTI OPERATION on the remote setup  
MULTI OPERATION  
menu.  
SETUP  
1/3  
CALIBRATE  
Add  
Replace  
Delay  
Run  
OK  
PRESET RECALL  
LEARNING  
Delete  
MULTI OPERATION  
DIRECT FUNCTION  
4
Choose the component and command you want  
to add to the multi operation or shutdown  
sequence.  
For example, choose DVD/LD from the select function  
menu (this now takes the name of the multi-operation  
component), then (play) or (stop) from the DVD  
menu to start (or stop) playback on your DVD player.  
2
From the ‘Select Function’ screen, choose the  
input function.  
This will be the one that starts the multi operation when  
you select it as an input source. For example, press DVD/  
LD if the multi operation is being used to switch on the  
DVD player connected to the DVD/LD terminals.  
MULTI OPERATION  
END  
DVD/LD  
MULTI OPERATION  
DVD  
1/2  
TV  
DVD  
CONT  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
CANCEL  
• Press END to go back without making any changes.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling other equipment  
08  
• You don't need to program the receiver to switch to  
the input function selected in step 2, or to switch on  
or off. This is done automatically.  
• To add a new command above another command,  
press the existing command before pressing Add.  
• To erase a command, select the operation you want  
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to:  
to erase and press Delete.  
• program the power to switch off in a shutdown  
sequence;  
• Commands will be stored regardless of how you exit  
from this screen.  
• program the power to switch on if it’s the source  
component selected in step 2;  
7
Press OK when you’re finished.  
PLEASE WAIT shows in the remote display while the  
• program a Pioneer TV or monitor to switch on if the  
input function (selected in step 2) has video input  
terminals;  
multi operation is stored and you’ll return to step 2.  
Using multi operations  
These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).  
You can start multi operations with the receiver switched  
on, or in standby.  
5
If necessary, add a delay between operations by  
pressing ‘Delay’.  
1
From the remote control Home menu  
press  
Some components may take a few seconds to switch on  
or off, or perform certain operations. In these cases, you  
may want to add a slight delay (up to sixty seconds is  
possible) between commands.  
MULTI OPERATION.  
HOME  
1/3  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
Use the + and buttons on the Delay Time screen to  
adjust the delay time then press OK.  
INPUT  
1
2
3
TV  
/ DVD  
DVD  
/ LD  
SAT  
DVD/LD  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
MULTI OPERATION  
CD  
TUNER  
Delay Time  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
SETUP  
0.1 sec  
+
2
Press a function button that has been set up with  
a multi operation.  
OK  
CANCEL  
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the  
programmed multi operation is performed automatically.  
• If you want to change the delay time after it’s been  
set, press the delay time, then press SET to come  
back to this screen.  
MULTI OPERATION  
Select Function  
DVD  
/ LD  
TV  
/ DVD  
SAT  
6
Repeat steps 3 to 5 for additional commands.  
As each command is entered, they will appear in order on  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
the remote touch screen.  
CD-R  
/ TAPE1  
VCR2  
VCR3  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
TV  
CONT  
VIDEO  
DVD/LD  
MULTI OPERATION  
CANCEL  
DVD -  
PLAY  
Delay - 2.0sec  
Add  
Replace  
Delay  
Run  
OK  
Delete  
• To test the sequence before confirming it, press Run.  
• To replace a command in the sequence, select the  
command then press Replace. Add the operation as  
shown in the steps above.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling other equipment  
08  
2
Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that  
Using System off  
component to the CONTROL IN jack of another  
Pioneer component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the  
From the remote control Home menu  
press  
SYSTEM OFF.  
The command sequence you programmed will run, then  
all Pioneer components will switch off, followed by this  
receiver.  
connection.  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
HOME  
1/3  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
2
3
TV  
/ DVD  
DVD  
/ LD  
SAT  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
VSX-59TXi  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
CONTROL  
MONITOR  
OUT  
1
OUT  
IN  
SETUP  
ANTENNA  
REMOTE IN  
MULTI ROOM  
SOURCE  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
MONITOR  
&
Y
ROOM  
&
OUT  
2
SOURCE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
ANTENNA  
IN  
LD)  
IN  
1
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
FM  
IN  
IN  
PB  
75UNBAL  
PB  
PR  
SAT  
IN  
PR  
Switching components on and off  
using the 12 volt trigger  
R
L
3
Continue the chain in the same way for as many  
You can connect components in your system (such as a  
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on  
or off using a 12 volt trigger when you select an input  
function. However, you must specify which input  
functions switch on which trigger(s) using the Expert  
Setup menu (see 12 Volt Trigger on page 95 to do this).  
Note that this will only work with components that have a  
standby mode.  
components as you have.  
Note  
• If you want to control all your components using this  
receiver’s remote control, refer to Using the remote  
control with other components on page 67 and  
Programming signals from other remote controls on  
page 69.  
Connect the 12V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to  
the 12V TRIGGER of another component.  
Two connections are possible. Use a cable with a mono  
mini-plug on each end for each connection.  
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch  
on the trigger(s), you’ll be able to switch the component  
on or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set  
on page 95.  
Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor  
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks  
which can be used to link components together so that  
you can use just the remote sensor of one component.  
When you use a remote control, the control signal is  
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.  
Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you also  
have at least one set of analog audio jacks connected to  
another component for grounding purposes.  
1
Decide which component you want to use the  
remote sensor of.  
When you want to control any component in the chain,  
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the  
corresponding remote control.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
09  
Chapter 9  
Using other functions  
Monitoring your recording  
Making an audio or a video recording  
You can listen to (monitor) the recording as it’s being  
made if you’ve connected a cassette deck with a  
monitoring function to the TAPE 2 MONITOR jacks on  
the rear panel.  
You can make an audio or a video recording from the  
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source  
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).  
Keep in mind you can't make a digital recording from an  
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the  
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in  
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on  
page 14 for more on connections).  
Press TAPE 2 MONITOR to switch between the  
recorded signal and the original source signal.  
With the remote, you may need to press on the  
RECEIVER  
Home menu ( ) first before reaching the receiver menu  
screen shown below (use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right)  
soft keys to go to the previous/next menu screen).  
You can record using composite and S-video  
connections interchangeably, but you won’t be able to  
record sources connected to the component video  
inputs. See About the video converter on page 22 for more  
on this.  
RECEIVER  
3/4  
TV  
For more information about video connections, see  
Connecting a VCR or DVD recorder on page 20 and  
Connecting other video sources on page 21.  
RECEIVER  
CONT  
SB CH  
MODE  
INPUT  
SPEAKER  
A/B  
INPUT  
ATT  
1
Select the source you want to record.  
VIDEO  
DISPLAY  
DIMMER  
SELECT  
Use the INPUT buttons (or the INPUT SELECTOR dial on  
the front panel).  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STATUS  
2
Select the input signal (if necessary).  
Press SIGNAL SELECT to select the input signal  
corresponding to the source component (see Selecting  
the input signal type on page 48 for more on this).  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
3
Prepare the source you want to record.  
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
4
Prepare the recorder.  
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording  
device and set the recording levels.  
Tip  
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if  
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set  
the audio recording level automatically—check the  
component's instruction manual if you're unsure.  
• To record the tape 2 monitor signal to a recorder  
connected to the CD-R/TAPE 1 inputs, select any  
input (except CD-R/TAPE 1) and switch the tape 2  
monitor on.  
5
Start recording, then start playback of the source  
component.  
Note  
• The receiver's volume, tone (bass, treble, Midnight,  
Loudness), and surround effects have no effect on  
the recorded signal.  
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can  
only be recorded in analog.  
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These  
cannot be recorded.  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
09  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
Reducing the level of an analog  
signal  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog  
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find  
the that the OVER indicator is lights often, or you can  
hear distortion in the sound.  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
2
Use the (OPTION) +/– buttons to adjust the  
amount of delay.  
From the remote control receiver menu, press  
INPUT ATT to switch the input attenuator on or off.  
You may need to press on the Home menu (  
The delay can be adjusted from 0.0–6.0 frames (in 0.1  
frame steps).  
)
RECEIVER  
3
Press ENTER to confirm.  
first before reaching the receiver menu screen shown  
below (use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) soft keys to go to  
the previous/next menu screen).  
Note  
• When listening to an analog source, you can’t use  
sound delay when Stream Direct is on.  
3/4  
RECEIVER  
TV  
• One second is equal to 30 frames of NTSC format  
video, and 25 frames of PAL.  
RECEIVER  
CONT  
SB CH  
MODE  
INPUT  
SPEAKER  
A/B  
INPUT  
ATT  
Watching video and audio sources  
independently  
VIDEO  
DISPLAY  
DIMMER  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STATUS  
You can listen to a sound source and select a different  
video source on your TV.  
While listening to a source, press VIDEO SELECT  
to select the video source you want to watch.  
With the remote, you may need to press on the  
Note  
RECEIVER  
• The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or  
when using Stream Direct modes 2 or 3.  
Home menu ( ) first before reaching the receiver menu  
screen shown below (use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right)  
soft keys to go to the previous/next menu screen).  
Adjusting the delay of a soundtrack  
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video,  
so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the  
picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound  
to match the presentation of the video.  
RECEIVER  
3/4  
TV  
CONT  
RECEIVER  
SB CH  
MODE  
INPUT  
SPEAKER  
A/B  
INPUT  
ATT  
1
Press OPTION repeatedly until SOUND DELAY  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
DISPLAY  
DIMMER  
shows in the display.  
With the remote, you may need to press  
on the  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
RECEIVER  
STATUS  
Home menu ( ) first before reaching the receiver menu  
screen shown below (use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right)  
soft keys to go to the previous/next menu screen).  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
2/4  
RECEIVER  
TV  
CONT  
RECEIVER  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
MIDNIGHT DIGITAL NR  
TONE LOUDNESS  
Press repeatedly to cycle through the possible video  
sources. You can select DVD/LD, TV, SAT, VIDEO, DVR/  
VCR1, VCR2, VCR3 or OFF (no video signal).  
+
+
OPTION  
CH LEVEL  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
09  
Using the A/D converters to give  
Note  
greater definition to 2-channel sound  
• If you change the source using the input buttons (or  
front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial), the system  
returns to normal playback.  
This receiver has high-quality 192kHz (24bit) A/D  
converters that can be used in parallel to provide greater  
resolution of DSP processing with analog 2-channel  
sources. There are two ways to get 192kHz A/D  
conversion:  
Enhancing SACD playback  
You can get more detail from SACDs by maximizing the  
dynamic range (during digital processing) using the  
SACD gain feature.  
1
Switch the SD:1 NORMAL Stream Direct mode  
on.  
See Using the Stream Direct mode on page 47 for more on  
this.  
1
Press OPTION repeatedly until SACD GAIN shows  
in the display.  
2
Select the STEREO listening mode and switch off  
With the remote, you may need to press  
on the  
RECEIVER  
any other sound processing features.  
These features include:  
Home menu ( ) first before reaching the receiver menu  
screen shown below (use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right)  
soft keys to go to the previous/next menu screen).  
• Midnight/Loudness (page 52)  
• Digital Noise Reduction (page 53)  
• Dynamic Range Control (page 94)  
Receiver  
Also, make sure you also switch the multichannel input  
to 2 CHANNEL in Selecting USB and multichannel analog  
input channels on page 49.  
MIDNIGHT DIGITAL NR  
TONE  
LOUDNESS  
+
+
OPTION  
CH LEVEL  
Dimming the display  
You can choose between four brightness for the front  
panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the  
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.  
From the remote control receiver menu, press  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
DISPLAY DIMMER repeatedly to change the  
brightness of the front panel display.  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
You may need to press  
on the Home menu (  
)
RECEIVER  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
first before reaching the receiver menu screen shown  
below (use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) soft keys to go to  
the previous/next menu screen).  
2
Use the (OPTION) +/– buttons to switch the SACD  
gain between 0dB and 6dB.  
For most SACD sources, selecting 6dB will result in high  
sound quality and greater detail. The level will be  
adjusted automatically for playback at the same volume.  
RECEIVER  
3/4  
TV  
CONT  
RECEIVER  
SB CH  
MODE  
INPUT  
3
Press ENTER to confirm.  
SPEAKER  
A/B  
INPUT  
ATT  
VIDEO  
DISPLAY  
DIMMER  
SELECT  
Note  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STATUS  
• You shouldn’t have any problems using this feature  
with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is  
best to switch the gain setting back to 0dB.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
09  
Switching the speaker impedance  
Checking your system settings  
• Default setting: Speaker 6  
Use the status display screen to check the various  
settings you’ve made for features such as sound delay,  
digital noise reduction, and high-sampling.  
We recommend using speakers of 6to 16with this  
system, but it is possible to switch the impedance setting  
if you plan to use speakers with a lower impedance rating  
(for example, less than 6).  
1
From the remote control receiver menu, press  
STATUS to check the system settings.  
You may need to press on the Home menu (  
With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/  
)
RECEIVER  
ON while holding down the OPTION – button.  
first before reaching the receiver menu screen shown  
below (use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) soft keys to go to  
the previous/next menu screen).  
STANDBY/ON  
RECEIVER  
3/4  
STANDBY  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
CD-R/  
TAPE1/MD  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
DVR/VCR1  
VCR2  
VCR3  
CD  
TUNER  
P
OFF  
ON  
TV  
CONT  
RECEIVER  
INPUT SELECTOR  
SB CH  
MODE  
INPUT  
SPEAKER  
A/B  
INPUT  
ATT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
DISPLAY  
DIMMER  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STATUS  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
These appear on both the OSD and the front panel  
display.  
DIGITALIN  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
SB CH MODE  
ACOUS. CAL EQ  
DIGITAL NR  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
ALL ADJ  
OFF  
Each time you do this, you switch between the  
impedance settings:  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
DVD/LD  
CH1  
0.0frame  
OFF  
OFF  
TONE CONTROL  
VIDEO SELECT  
DUAL MONO  
SOUND DELAY  
HI-BIT  
Speaker 4 – Use this setting if your speakers are  
rated lower than 6.  
HI-SAMPLING  
REAL PHANTOM  
Speaker 6 – Use this setting if your speakers are  
OFF  
rated 6or more.  
The front panel display shows each of the following  
settings for two seconds each:  
Note  
Surround back speaker/  
Virtual back speaker  
Video select  
• If you select Speaker 4 above, the Stream Direct  
setting is fixed at SD:1 NORMAL (see Using the  
Stream Direct mode on page 47).  
Acoustic calibration EQ  
Digital noise reduction  
Midnight  
Dual mono  
Sound delay  
Hi-bit  
Loudness  
High-sampling  
Real phantom  
Tone  
Note  
• If the Stream Direct mode is switched on, some  
settings above will show OFF, even though they are  
switched on.  
2
When you’re finished, press STATUS again to  
switch off the display.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
Resetting the system  
09  
Setting type  
Tone  
Default setting  
BYPASS  
Page ref.  
page 52  
page 53  
page 53  
page 58  
page 58  
page 59  
Use this feature to reset the system to its factory default  
settings (see Default receiver settings below).  
Digital NR  
OFF  
1
Switch the receiver into standby.  
Dual mono  
CH1  
2
While holding down the front panel DIGITAL NR  
Speakers Systems  
Speaker B setting  
Normal Surround  
Second Zone  
All SMALL  
button, press and hold STANDBY/ON for about  
three seconds.  
The display shows RESET?.  
Speakers (front,  
center, surround,  
surround back) setting  
3
Press the front panel OPTION + button.  
The display shows OK?.  
Subwoofer setting  
YES  
page 59  
page 59  
page 60  
page 61  
4
Within 5 seconds, press OPTION –.  
The receiver should now be reset.  
Crossover frequency 80Hz  
Channel levels  
All 0 dB (no adjustment)  
All 10 ft.  
Note  
Speaker distance  
settings  
• This doesn’t affect the presets that you have  
programmed into the remote control (see Using the  
remote control with other components on page 67).  
See Resetting the remote control below to do this.  
Acoustic Calibration 0dB (no calibration)  
page 61  
X-Curve  
OFF (switches to ON after the page 61  
Auto Surround Setup)  
Tape 2 monitor  
Input attenuator  
Sound delay  
OFF  
page 75  
page 76  
page 76  
page 77  
page 80  
Default receiver settings  
The table below shows the factory default settings. When  
you reset the system, the receiver reverts to these  
defaults:  
OFF (all inputs)  
0.0 frames  
SACD gain  
0dB  
A
Setting type  
Input  
Default setting  
DVD/LD  
Page ref.  
Speaker A/B setting  
Digital jack  
assignment  
Digital-1 (coaxial) – DVD/LD page 90  
Digital-2 (coaxial) – TV/DVD  
Digital-3 (coaxial) – CD  
Digital-4 (optical) – SAT  
Digital-5 (optical) – DVR/VCR1  
Digital-6 (optical) –  
Master volume  
Listening mode  
– – – dB (no sound)  
STANDARD (video inputs,  
multichannel inputs, USB)  
STEREO (audio inputs)  
page 43  
CD-R/TAPE1/MD  
2RF (coaxial) – DVD/LD  
Advanced surround  
effect level  
90 (5/7CH STEREO)  
50 (all other modes)  
page 45  
page 46  
page 47  
page 47  
Component video jack Component1 DVD/LD  
page 91  
page 92  
Listening mode (w/  
headphones)  
STEREO  
assignment  
Component2 OFF  
Component3 OFF  
USB / multichannel  
input channel setting  
8 channels  
Video input  
assignment  
MULTI IN OFF  
USB OFF  
Stream Direct mode  
SD:1 NORMAL (ON)  
Bass Peak Level  
OFF (No limit)  
page 93  
page 94  
Acoustic Calibration OFF (switches to ALL CH ADJ page 48  
Dynamic range  
control  
OFF  
EQ  
after the Auto Surround Setup)  
Input signal select  
AUTO except multichannel  
inputs (ANALOG) and USB  
(DIGITAL)  
page 48  
OSD overlay  
ON  
page 94  
page 95  
page 96  
page 96  
12 volt trigger  
OFF · OFF  
Surround Back  
Channel mode  
ON (with surround back  
speaker(s) connected)  
page 50  
page 51  
THX Ultra2 subwoofer NO  
Surround back  
speaker position  
0–1ft  
Virtual Surround Back OFF  
mode  
Hi-bit/Hi-sampling  
Midnight/Loudness  
OFF  
OFF  
page 52  
page 52  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
10  
Chapter 10  
Other connections  
SPAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up  
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two  
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.  
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as  
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel  
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels). The same  
signal as speaker A is output from the pre-out  
terminals, except for the surround back pre-outs,  
which output the same signal as speaker B.  
Using speaker system B  
You can connect a pair of speakers to the B speaker  
terminals on the rear panel to listen to stereo playback in  
another room, or you can also use these terminals to  
hear surround sound when playing DVD-Audio sources.  
Once you’ve made these connections, you’ll have to  
change the speaker setting in Speaker Systems on  
page 58 to specify how you’re using speaker system B.  
SP(off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The  
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals as  
when selecting speaker system A (above).  
Switching the speaker system  
This unit has three speaker system settings which allow  
you to select the speaker system(s) you want to use.  
What you will hear depends on the settings you made in  
Speaker Systems on page 58. If you selected Normal  
Surround for speaker system A, and Second Zone for  
speaker system B, sound is output according to the  
explanations below.  
Note  
• The subwoofer output depends on the settings you  
made in Speaker Systems on page 58. However, if  
SPB is selected above, no sound is heard from the  
subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).  
Use the SPEAKER A/B button on the remote  
control receiver menu screen to select a speaker  
system setting.  
You can also use the SP SYSTEM A/B button on the front  
panel.  
• Depending on the settings in Speaker Systems on  
page 58 and Using the Stream Direct mode on  
page 47, output from the surround back pre-out  
terminals may change.  
• All speaker systems are switched off when  
headphones are connected.  
RECEIVER  
3/4  
TV  
CONT  
RECEIVER  
Using speaker system B in another room  
Connect a pair of speakers to the speaker B terminals on  
the rear panel the same way you connected your  
speakers in Connecting the speakers on page 26. Make  
sure to review Placing the speakers on page 27 when  
placing the speakers in another room.  
SB CH  
INPUT  
MODE  
SPEAKER  
A/B  
INPUT  
ATT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
DISPLAY  
DIMMER  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STATUS  
We recommend using speakers with a nominal  
impedance between 6–16(please see Switching the  
speaker impedance on page 78 if you plan to use speakers  
with a lower impedance).  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
Alternating surround speaker setups using  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
speaker system B (ITU-R)  
Press repeatedly to cycle through the speaker system  
options:  
After you connect an alternate set of surround speakers,  
you can use speaker system B to provide surround sound  
when listening to sources like DVD-Audio discs. This will  
give you a setup of 9 speakers where the front and center  
speakers can be used with normal 7.1 surround (speaker  
system A), or 5.1 surround with DVD-Audio sources  
(speaker system B in ITU-R setting).  
SPA – Sound is output from speaker system A and  
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.  
SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers  
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel  
sources will be downmixed to these two speakers.  
The same signal is output from the surround back  
channel pre-out terminals.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
10  
1
Connect an alternate (ITU-R) set of surround  
SPB: ITU-R – ITU-R surround setup for DVD-Audio  
and other multichannel music sources. See Speaker  
system setup for DVD-Audio/multichannel music  
sources on page 98 for more on this.  
speakers as shown below.  
Connect the ITU-R surround left speaker to the left  
speaker terminal of speaker system B. Connect the ITU-R  
surround right speaker in the same way.  
A
ITU-R surround  
L
left speaker  
FRONT  
R
CENTER  
L
SUR-  
ROUND  
ITU-R surround  
R
right speaker  
B
(Single)  
L
L
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SPOFF– No sound is output from the speakers.  
R
R
Note  
• Make sure that the + / connections are properly  
• Depending on the Stream Direct mode, the surround  
channel signal(s) will be output from either the  
surround, or surround back channel pre-outs when  
SPB: ITU-R is selected.  
inserted.  
2
Select the ‘ITU-R’ setting from the Speaker  
Systems menu.  
See Speaker Systems on page 58 to specify how you’re  
using speaker system B. Normal Surround should be  
selected to make this setting.  
Bi-amping your front speakers  
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver  
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different  
amplifiers (in this case, to both front and surround back  
terminals) for better crossover performance. Your  
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate  
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement  
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.  
3
Use the SPEAKER A/B button on the remote  
control receiver menu screen to select a speaker  
system setting.  
You can also use the SP SYSTEM A/B button on the front  
panel.  
Choose between the following settings (the shaded  
boxes indicate the active speakers in each setup):  
1
Connect your speakers as shown below.  
SPA: Normal – Normal surround (for movies, etc.)  
This illustration below shows the connections for bi-  
amping your front left speaker. Hook up your front right  
speaker in the same way.  
A
L
FRONT  
Front left  
R
speaker  
CENTER  
L
Hi  
SUR-  
ROUND  
R
B
(Single)  
L
L
Lo  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
R
Since both front and surround back speaker terminals  
output the same audio, it doesn’t matter which set (front  
or surround back) is powering which part (Hi or Low) of  
the speaker.  
• Make sure that the + / connections are properly  
inserted.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
10  
2
Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from the  
Adding a second set of surround  
speakers for Bi-Surround  
Speaker Systems menu.  
See Speaker Systems on page 58 to specify how you’re  
If your listening area is quite long, and you are seated far  
from the front speakers, you may want to add an extra set  
of left and right surround speakers instead of your  
surround back speakers. These should be placed  
between the front speakers and your existing surround  
speakers (which should already be placed on either side  
of your listening position).  
using the surround back speaker terminals.  
Note  
• For 7.1 surround sound with this configuration, you  
must connect an additional amplifier to the surround  
back channel pre-outs. See Connecting additional  
amplifiers on page 82 for more on this.  
1
Connect a second set of surround speakers as  
shown below.  
Connect the second surround left speaker to the  
surround back left speaker terminal. Connect the second  
surround right speaker in the same way.  
Caution  
• Most speakers with both Hi and Low terminals have  
two metal plates that connect the Hi to the Low  
terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-  
amping the speakers or you could severely damage  
the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more  
information.  
A
2nd surround  
L
left speaker  
FRONT  
R
CENTER  
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,  
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing  
so may damage your speakers.  
L
SUR-  
ROUND  
2nd surround  
R
right speaker  
B
(Single)  
L
L
Bi-wiring your speakers  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
The reasons for bi-wiring are basically the same as bi-  
amping, but additionally, interference effects within the  
wire could be reduced, producing better sound. Again, to  
do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they  
must have separate terminals for the high and low  
frequencies). When bi-wiring, make sure you’ve selected  
Normal Surround in Speaker Systems on page 58.  
R
R
• Make sure that the + / connections are properly  
inserted.  
2
Select the ‘Bi-Surround’ setting from the Speaker  
Systems menu.  
See Speaker Systems on page 58 to specify how you’re  
using the surround back speaker terminals.  
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords  
to each speaker terminal on the receiver.  
Using the pre-outs  
Connecting additional amplifiers  
This receiver has more than enough power for any home  
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every  
channel of your system using the pre-outs. If you use  
additional amps for the front channels take out the U-  
shaped connectors (see item 8 in Rear panel on page 14).  
Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to  
power your speakers.  
Caution  
• Make sure you use a parallel (not series, which are  
fairly uncommon) connection when bi-wiring your  
speakers.  
• Don't connect different speakers from the same  
terminal in this way.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
10  
Multi-room setup  
Note  
When used together with an optional IR receiver, this  
receiver can power two independent systems in separate  
rooms. Different sources can be playing in both rooms at  
the same time or, depending on your needs, the same  
source can also be used. The main and sub rooms have  
independent power (the main room power can be off  
while the sub room is on) and the sub room can be  
controlled by this unit's remote control. You may need to  
specify your volume setting and IR receiver type in Multi-  
Room Setting on page 95.  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch  
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
AC outlet.  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
L
R
Front channel  
amplifier  
DIGITAL  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
USB AUDIO  
IN  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
Center channel  
amplifier (mono)  
AUDO  
CD  
IN  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
R
L
FRONT  
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
R
L
IN  
5
R
L
OUT  
REC  
CENTER  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
Powered subwoofer  
CD-R/  
TAPE1  
/MD  
IN  
4
SUB W.  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
1
2
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
3
2
1
ANALOG  
INPUT  
R
Making multi-room connections  
TAPE2  
R
L
MONITOR  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
L
(TV/  
Surround  
channel  
amplifier  
IN  
IN  
DVD)  
IN  
PLAY  
It is possible to make these connections if you have a  
separate amplifier, speakers, TV and an IR receiver (such  
as the Pioneer MR-100) for your sub room.  
R
L
(Single)  
FRONT  
SUB W.  
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
R
L
L
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
(Single)  
L
2RF  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
R
(DVD/  
LD)  
IN  
R
R
L
Surround back  
channel amplifier  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
1
Connect the IR receiver sensor to the green  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE REMOTE IN jack on the rear  
of this receiver.  
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround  
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In  
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))  
terminal only.  
2
Connect a separate amplifier and TV monitor to  
the MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE OUT jacks on the rear of  
this receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub  
room amplifier as shown in the illustration below.  
Connecting an external stereo pre-amplifier  
It’s possible to use a separate stereo pre-amp with this  
receiver if necessary. You might want to do this if you  
need to connect more sources than this receiver can  
accommodate, or if you prefer to use a specific pre-amp  
for sound quality reasons. You can connect sources to  
either this receiver or to the external pre-amp (giving you  
a greater number of input possibilities).  
CONTROL  
MONITOR  
OUT  
1
IN  
REMOTE IN  
MULTI-  
MONITOR  
MULTI ROOM  
&
Y
ROOM  
&
OUT  
IN  
2
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
(DVD/  
LD)  
IN  
1
Y
MONITO  
OUT  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
IN  
PB  
PB  
Sub room  
Main room  
CONTROL  
A
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
1
OUT  
IN  
USB AUDIO  
Note that with sources connected this receiver, any  
signal sent to the two front channels will be sent to the  
pre-amplifier before being heard through the front  
speakers in your system.  
ANTENNA  
L
REMOTE IN  
AC OUTLET  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
MONITOR  
MULTI ROOM  
&
Y
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
2
SOURCE  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
SOURCE  
AC 120  
V
60Hz  
R
L
PHONO  
IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
SWITCHED 100W (0.8A) MAX  
DVD/  
LD  
(DVD/  
LD)  
AM LOOP  
2
1
IN  
R
ANTENNA  
IN  
IN  
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
Y
PB  
PR  
1
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
FM  
IN  
IN  
PB  
75UNBAL  
CENTER  
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
SAT  
IN  
PR  
AC IN  
IN  
5
R
L
R
L
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
2
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
L
3
Y
IN  
4
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
SELECTABLE (SURROUND BACK  
B
&
B
)
IN  
IN  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
R
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
3
2
1
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
R
L
TAPE  
2
M
ONITOR  
(TV/  
L
(Single)  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
FRONT  
DVD)  
L
(Single)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
SUB  
W
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
L
R
R
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
L(Single)  
2RF  
IN  
1
(DVD/  
LD)  
R
R
DC OUT 12V  
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
SPEAKERS  
1
Remove the U-shaped connectors that connect  
the FRONT PRE OUT jacks to the POWER AMP IN  
jacks.  
IR receiver  
(MR-100, etc.)  
2
Use a stereo RCA audio cable to connect the  
FRONT PRE OUT jacks of this receiver to a stereo  
input on the pre-amp.  
Note  
• It is not possible to hear the digital output of a  
component in the sub room. However, you can  
connect the analog outputs of your digital  
component into the receiver’s (analog) input  
For example, connect to the CD or tape inputs on the rear  
of the pre-amp. You’ll have to select that source if you  
want to hear the stereo signal from this receiver.  
3
Use a stereo RCA audio cable to connect the  
terminals to hear the component in the sub room.  
stereo pre-out jacks of the pre-amp to the POWER  
AMP IN jack of this receiver.  
• You can't use sound controls (such as the tone  
controls or Midnight listening) or any surround  
modes in the sub room. You can, however, use the  
features available with your sub room amplifier.  
This will allow you to hear the stereo source from the  
external pre-amp through this receiver. For stereo  
sources connected directly to the external pre-amp, this  
receiver acts as a standard power amplifier. For digital  
sources connected to this receiver, the receiver acts as a  
digital decoder/digital-to-analog converter and as a  
power amplifier.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
10  
• When selected in the main room, i.LINK sources  
can’t be heard in the sub room unless they can  
output both i.LINK and analog signals at the same  
time. Also, the sound from an i.LINK source selected  
in the sub room switches off if the same source is  
selected as an i.LINK source in the main room.  
Tip  
• Press MR&S ON/OFF to use the buttons on the Sub  
Room Control screen in the sub room.  
4/4  
RECEIVER  
- Sub Room Control -  
MR&S  
Using the sub room controls  
+
VOLUME  
ON/OFF  
You can use the remote to adjust the sub room volume  
and select sources from either the main room or the sub  
room. You can also do this using the front panel controls.  
DVD  
/LD  
TV  
CD  
SAT  
DVR  
/VCR1  
CD-R  
/TAPE1  
TUNER  
INPUT  
Important  
• The receiver must be switched on (or in standby) in  
the main room to control the sub room.  
Using the remote control in the main room  
From the receiver menu screens on the remote  
control, select the Sub Room Control screen.  
If you’re unsure how to do this, see Receiver menu  
screens on page 34.  
Using the remote control in the sub room  
1
1
Point the remote control at the IR receiver and  
press RECEIVER.  
This switches on the multi-room feature (MULTI  
ROOM&SOURCE).  
2
Use the Home menu screen buttons to control  
RECEIVER  
4/4  
the sub room.  
- Sub Room Control -  
MR&S  
The INPUT buttons work for the sub room the same way  
they would for the main room (see Home menu screens  
on page 33 for more detail), and the hard-key volume  
controls adjust the volume in the sub room.  
+
VOLUME  
ON/OFF  
DVD  
/LD  
TV  
CD  
SAT  
DVR  
/VCR1  
CD-R  
/TAPE1  
TUNER  
INPUT  
HOME  
1/3  
HOME  
2/3  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
2
3
1
INPUT  
2
3
2
Press MR&S ON/OFF to switch on the multi-room  
TV  
DVD  
/ LD  
CD-R  
/ TAPE1  
SAT  
VCR2  
VCR3  
/ DVD  
feature.  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CD  
TUNER  
VIDEO  
You can also press the MULTI ROOM & SOURCE ON/  
OFF button on the front panel.  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
The MULTI ROOM indicator lights on the front panel to  
indicate the multi-room feature has been switched on.  
SETUP  
SETUP  
3
Use the Sub Room Control screen buttons the  
same way you control this receiver from the main  
Home menu.  
The source input buttons work the same way as the  
controls listed in Home menu screens on page 33, and  
the on-screen volume control adjusts the sub room.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
10  
Using the front panel multi-room controls  
Using the i.LINK interface  
If you have a component with an i.LINK connector, you  
can connect it to this receiver using an i.LINK cable.  
MULTI ROOM  
CONTROL  
&
SOURCE  
ON/OFF  
SBCH  
MODE  
ACOUSTIC  
CAL.  
TUNER  
TONE  
OPTION  
DIGITALNR  
CLASS  
STATION  
MIDNIGHT  
VIDEOINPUT  
PHONES  
SPSYSTEM  
A/B  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
TAPE2  
MONITOR  
STREAM  
DIRECT  
SETUP  
MIC  
DIGITALIN  
Since the i.LINK interface does not transmit video  
signals, the video signal of i.LINK-connected compo-  
nents must be connected with other cables (see  
Connecting your equipment on page 14 for more on  
making video connections). If you’ve already hooked up  
the video signal from the component, assign the i.LINK  
input to the input function to which you’ve connected the  
video signals (see Assigning the i.LINK inputs on  
page 91).  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
1
Press the MULTI ROOM & SOURCE ON/OFF  
button on the front panel.  
The MULTI ROOM indicator lights on the front panel to  
indicate the multi-room control has been switched on.  
2
Press CONTROL.  
Make sure that any operations for the sub room are done  
while MULTI ROOM shows in the display. If MULTI  
ROOM is not showing, the front panel controls affect the  
main room only.  
The two i.LINK connectors on the rear of your receiver are  
4-pin connectors. Use a 4-pin, S400 i.LINK cable to  
connect i.LINK-equipped components.  
3
Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source.  
Important  
Select between DVD/LD, TV/DVD, SAT, DVR/VCR 1, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1 or TUNER (in that order).  
• Please use 4-pin, S400 cables less than 3.5 meters  
long. Although longer ones are available, they may  
not work reliably.  
If you select TUNER, you can use the front panel TUNER  
controls to select a preset station (see Listening to  
memorized station presets on page 56 if you’re unsure  
how to do this).  
• If your i.LINK connector comes into contact with  
metallic parts of the receiver other than the i.LINK  
terminal, an electrical short may occur. Some cables  
have metal parts that may touch the unit when  
connected. Please take care to use a suitable i.LINK  
cable only.  
4
Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the  
volume.  
This is only possible if you selected the VARIABLE  
volume control in Multi-Room Setting on page 95.  
• There may be cases where the PQLS/rate control  
function and/or the i.LINK audio does not work prop-  
erly even when connected to i.LINK Audio-compat-  
ible equipment.  
5
When you’re finished, press CONTROL again to  
return to the main room controls.  
You can also press the MULTI ROOM & SOURCE ON/  
OFF button on the front panel to switch off all output to  
the sub room.  
• During playback through an i.LINK connection, do  
not disconnect i.LINK cables or switch off any  
components connected using i.LINK.  
• Copy-protected 96kHz DVD-Video discs can be heard  
through the i.LINK connection, but they will be down-  
sampled to 48kHz.  
Note  
• Multi-room can’t be used when you’re setting up the  
system (from the on-screen System Setup menu).  
• If you’re using a Pioneer amplifier in the sub room,  
you may want to cover the remote sensor so that this  
remote control doesn’t accidently control the sub  
room amplifier.  
• You won’t be able to switch the main room off  
completely unless you’ve switched off the multi-room  
control first.  
• When someone is controlling the system from the  
main room, you won’t be able to operate the sub  
room controls.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
10  
Use an i.LINK cable to connect one of the i.LINK  
About PQLS rate control  
connectors on this receiver to an i.LINK connector on  
your i.LINK component.  
Pioneer's PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System)  
technology provides high-precision digital audio from  
DVD-A, SACD and audio CD sources when you use the  
i.LINK interface. A precision quartz controller in this  
receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors  
(jitter), giving you the best possible digital-to-analog  
conversion from the digital source.  
CONTROL  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
USB AUDIO  
1
OUT  
IN  
REMOTE IN  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
MONITOR  
MULTI ROOM  
&
Y
IN  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
2
SOURCE  
SOURCE  
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
(DVD/  
IN  
OUT 2  
OUT 1  
LD)  
IN  
1
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
IN  
IN  
PB  
PB  
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
SAT  
IN  
PR  
To take advantage of PQLS, you must have a player  
compatible with rate-control, and it must be switched on  
and connected to this receiver through the i.LINK  
network.  
R
L
IN  
5
R
L
PR  
CENTER  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
2
3
Y
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
4
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
IN  
IN  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
3
2
1
R
R
L
TAPE 2  
MONITOR  
(TV/  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
DVD)  
L
(Single)  
FRONT  
SUB  
W
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
L
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
L(Single)  
2RF  
(DVD/  
LD)  
IN  
R
R
12V TRIGGER  
Creating an i.LINK network  
R
L
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
Using i.LINK it is possible to chain up to 17 components  
together so that the digital audio and control signals  
from each component is available to other components  
in the network. With the addition of an i.LINK repeater,  
it’s possible to connect up to 63 components.  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
i.LINK connectors come in 4-pin and 6-pin configura-  
tions. This player uses the 4-pin connection, but the two  
types can be mixed on a network.  
This receiver is compatible with i.LINK Audio (A&M  
protocol) components, such as DVD players. Note that  
when connected to i.LINK MPEG-II TS equipment (such  
as a digital satellite tuner), i.LINK DV equipment (such as  
a DVD recorder or DV camcorder), or an i.LINK-equipped  
personal computer, audio and video signals are not  
transmitted, and connecting to these devices sometimes  
causes network interruptions. Check the operating  
instructions supplied with your other i.LINK components  
for compatibility information.  
i.LINK-equipped component  
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be  
face down for correct alignment with the connector  
on the player. When properly connected, the i.LINK  
plug will snap into the connector. If not connected  
properly the receiver will not be able to recognize any  
connected components.  
This receiver is DTCP (Digital Transmission Content  
Protection) compliant, so you can play DVD-A, DVD-  
Video, and SACD i.LINK audio.  
When setting up an i.LINK network, it’s important that  
the components form an open ended chain (fig. 1), or a  
tree (fig. 2).  
Note  
i.LINK cable  
fig. 1  
• You can connect several components together using  
i.LINK. See Creating an i.LINK network below.  
About i.LINK  
i.LINK cable  
fig. 2  
i.LINK is a trademark name for IEEE1394, a high-speed  
interface for digital audio, video and other data found on  
personal computers, digital camcorders, and other kinds  
of audio and audio/visual equipment. A single i.LINK  
connector can both send and receive data at the same  
time, so only one cable is required to connect compo-  
nents for two-way communication.  
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks of Sony  
Corporation.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
10  
The system will not work if the connected components  
form a loop. If a loop is detected, the message LOOP  
CONNECT shows in the display. Figs. 3 and 4 show  
connections that form a loop.  
Using the USB interface  
It is possible to listen to multichannel audio sources from  
your computer by connecting to the USB interface on the  
rear of this receiver. Depending on your model of  
computer and the software installed, you can listen to  
any source compatible with your operating system  
through the speaker setup you’ve connected to this  
receiver.  
i.LINK cable  
fig. 3  
1
Connect your computer’s USB terminal to the  
USB terminal on the rear panel of this receiver.  
i.LINK cable  
fig. 4  
CONTROL  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
USB AUDIO  
1
OUT  
IN  
ANTENNA  
REMOTE IN  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
MULTI-  
MONITOR  
MULTI ROOM  
&
Y
IN  
ROOM  
&
OUT  
2
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
SOURCE  
R
L
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PHONO  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
(DVD/  
AM LOOP  
IN  
OU
OUT 1  
LD)  
IN  
1
ANTENNA  
Y
AUDIO  
POWER  
AMP  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
TV/  
DVD  
IN  
FM  
IN  
IN  
PB  
75UNBAL  
PB  
6
(CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD)  
SAT  
IN  
PR  
R
L
IN  
5
R
L
PR  
CENTER  
Another consideration when connecting i.LINK devices  
is the speed of the interface. At present there are three  
speeds; S100 (slowest), S200 and S400 (fastest). This  
receiver uses the S400 type. Although you can use  
components with different speeds together, we  
recommend connecting slower-speed components at  
the edge of the network if possible (shown by the shaded  
boxes in figs. 1 and 2). This will keep the network free of  
bottlenecks.  
OUT  
REC  
(DVR/  
VCR1)  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
2
3
Y
CD-R/  
TAPE1/  
MD  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
4
DVR/  
VCR1  
IN  
Y
SUB W.  
PRE OUT  
2
SUR-  
ROUND  
(SAT)  
(CD)  
IN  
IN  
1
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
(Single)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
VCR2  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
3
2
1
R
R
L
TAPE 2  
MONITOR  
(TV/  
DVD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
IN  
IN  
PLAY  
FRONT  
L
(Single)  
SUB  
W
CENTER  
(DVD/  
LD)  
OUT  
VCR3  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
L
SUR-  
ROUND  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
L(Single)  
1
2RF  
IN  
(DVD/  
LD)  
R
R
DC OUT 12V  
12V TRIGGER  
R
L
TOTAL 100mA MAX  
RS-232C  
ASSIGNABLE  
MULTI CH INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S2 VIDEO  
2
VSX-59TXi  
When used within an i.LINK network, this receiver must  
be on for the i.LINK connection to be maintained. Other  
components in the network may or may not maintain the  
connection in standby (none will when the power is  
completely off)—check the operating instructions  
supplied with individual components. Note that the audio  
may be momentarily interrupted if a component in the  
i.LINK network is switched on/off, or its i.LINK  
Personal computer  
2
3
Switch on your computer and this receiver.  
If you’re connecting for the first time, wait for  
connection is switched on/off.  
the USB driver installation to finish.  
This product complies with the following i.LINK interface  
specifications:  
The installation may take a minute or two to complete.  
Make sure you leave the USB cable connected until the  
dialog box indicates that the USB setup is finished. Note  
that some older operating systems may require a disc for  
installation.  
1) IEEE Std. 1394a-2000, Standard for a High Performance  
Serial Bus  
2) Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol 2.0  
Following the standard for AM824 sequence adaptation  
layers, the product is compatible with IEC60958 bitstream,  
DVD-A and SACD.  
4
(
Press ‘USB’ on the remote control Home menu  
) screen.  
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front  
panel to select USB.  
5
Make any necessary settings required to select  
the USB interface as your computer audio output.  
You will need to access your speaker settings from the  
Control Panel of your operating system:  
Windows® XP – Select Sound, Speech, and Audio  
Devices, and then select Change the speaker  
settings. Select Audio, then PIONEER AV Receiver/  
Amplifier from the drop down menu.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
10  
Windows® 98SE – Select Multimedia, and then  
select Audio. Choose PIONEER AV Receiver/  
Amplifier from the drop down menu.  
Windows® Me/Windows® 2000 – Select Sound  
and Multimedia and then select Audio. Choose  
PIONEER AV Receiver/Amplifier from the drop  
down menu.  
Caution  
• Make sure you don’t switch off the computer or  
unplug the USB cable during playback.  
• To prevent noise being output, don’t use other  
software on your computer during playback.  
• Pioneer is not responsible for computer system  
damage, software crashes or failures, or any other  
possible computer problems due to this  
configuration.  
Microsoft Windows® XP, Windows® 2000, Windows®  
Millennium Edition and Windows® 98 Second Edition are  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, Inc.  
You will also need to make sure the correct speaker  
setting is selected with the audio software you’re using.  
Please refer to the manual that came with the software to  
make these settings.  
6
Turn up the volume control on your computer  
and this receiver.  
You may want to start with a fairly low volume on this  
receiver and turn it up as necessary after you’ve checked  
your levels.  
Connecting a PC for Advanced  
MCACC output  
7
Start playback of a source on your computer.  
If you used the Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ on  
page 63 to measure the reverb characteristics of your  
listening room, you’ll be able to connect a computer  
using the RS-232C jack on the back panel to check the  
results graphically. Use a commercially-available RS-  
232C cable to connect the RS-232C jack on your  
computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on this receiver (the  
cable must be cross type, female–female).  
8
If necessary, press SIGNAL SELECT to choose the  
number of channels you’ll hear.  
See Selecting USB and multichannel analog input  
channels on page 49 for more on this.  
Note  
®
®
®
To obtain the software to output the results, please  
register this unit online as instructed on the front cover  
of the manual. After registering, you will be able to  
access the download area from the Pioneer website,  
where both the software and instruction manual will be  
available. If you have any questions regarding, please  
contact the Customer Support Division of Pioneer.  
• Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows  
®
Millennium Edition and Windows 98 Second  
Edition operating systems have been tested for  
compatibility with this interface, but depending on  
your computer setup, you may find that your system  
is not compatible.  
• This USB interface supports up to 8 channels of  
audio.  
Please make sure your system meets the following  
requirements:  
• Make sure you use a USB cable that connects from  
an A-type connector (from your PC) to a 4-pin B-type  
connector (to the receiver).  
®
®
• Operating system must be Windows XP, Windows  
®
®
2000, Windows Millennium Edition, Windows 98  
Second Edition, or Windows NT 4.0 (Service pack 6).  
®
• The USB specification is version 1.1 compatible, and  
the USB Audio Class specification is 1.0 compatible.  
• CPU must be at least Pentium 3 / 300MHz or AMD K6  
/ 300MHz (or equivalent) with at least 128MB of  
memory, and your monitor must be able to display a  
minimum resolution of 800x600.  
• You won’t be able to control this receiver using your  
computer (and vice-versa).  
• Sampling formats up to 48kHz can be heard using  
the USB connection (formats above 48kHz sampling  
must be downsampled).  
• An RS-232C port connector is necessary for  
graphical output. Refer to the operating instructions  
and/or the PC manufacturer for more information on  
making the proper port settings.  
• Any computer alert sounds will also be heard  
through the speakers unless you switch them off  
from the computer’s control panel.  
• System must have internet access.  
• You won’t be able to hear the audio from the USB  
connection through the digital outputs of this  
receiver.  
Before doing these steps, make sure you complete steps  
1–6 in Using Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ on  
page 64.  
• Even when the receiver is switched off, it will remain  
selected in your speaker settings.  
• Note that using hubs or extensions may cause  
connection problems.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
10  
1
Select ‘PC Output’ and press ENTER.  
When the receiver is ready for transmission, Operate a  
PC shows on the OSD.  
2.4. Acoustic Cal EQ Pro.  
Manual Pro.  
2.4. Acoustic Cal EQ Pro.  
Operate a PC  
[ Reverb Measurement ]  
[ Reverb View ]  
_
[ PC Output ]  
[ Advanced EQ Setup ]  
[Return]  
[Return]  
• If PC Output isn’t displayed, the receiver probably  
doesn’t have any transmission data. Make sure you  
have completed steps 1–6 in Using Professional  
Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 64.  
2
Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on  
the rear panel of the receiver.  
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS-  
232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on  
this receiver. See the documentation provided with the  
Advanced MCACC application for more information.  
RS-232C  
PC  
3
Start the MCACC application on your computer.  
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It  
will take about ten seconds for the transmission to  
complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on  
your computer. Since the data will be cleared from the  
receiver when you restart reverb measurement or turn off  
the receiver, you might want to save the information on  
your PC after measurement.  
4
When you’re finished, select ‘Return’ on the on-  
screen display.  
You’ll be taken to the Advanced EQ Setup. Depending on  
the results, you may want to continue with the Advanced  
EQ setup (see Setting Professional Acoustic Calibration  
EQ according to your room characteristics on page 63 for  
more on this). You can also simply press Return again to  
exit the Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ setup.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced setup  
11  
Chapter 11  
Advanced setup  
Assigning the digital inputs  
The Input Assign menu  
• Default settings:  
You only need to make settings in the Input Assign menu  
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to  
the default settings for the digital inputs, or if you have  
connected equipment using component video or i.LINK  
cables.  
Digital-1 (coaxial) – DVD/LD  
Digital-2 (coaxial) – TV/DVD  
Digital-3 (coaxial) – CD  
Digital-4 (optical) – SAT  
To access the Input Assign menu, follow the steps below.  
Digital-5 (optical) – DVR (/VCR1)  
Digital-6 (optical) – CD-R (/TAPE1/MD)  
2RF (coaxial) – DVD/LD  
1
Make sure your receiver and TV are both  
switched on.  
2
Using the remote control, press RECEIVER on the  
You only need to do this if you didn’t hook up your digital  
equipment according to the default settings for the  
digital inputs (see above). This setting tells the receiver  
what digital equipment is hooked up to which terminal so  
the buttons on the remote correspond to what you have  
hooked up.  
touch screen, then press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
HOME  
1/3  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
1
Select ‘Digital In’ from the Input Assign menu  
INPUT  
1
2
3
and press ENTER.  
TV  
/ DVD  
DVD  
/ LD  
SAT  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
1.Input Assign  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
[ 1.Digital In ]  
[ 2.Component Video In ]  
[ 3.i.LINK In ]  
[ 4.Video Assign ]  
SETUP  
[Return]  
ENTER  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
MUTE  
2
Select the number of the digital input to which  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
you’ve connected your digital component.  
The numbers correspond with the numbers beside the  
inputs on the back of the receiver.  
AV AMPLIFIER  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ/ꢁ hard keys and ENTER on the remote control  
to navigate through the screens and select menu items.  
1.1. Digital-In  
Digital-1  
Digital-2  
Digital-3  
Digital-4  
Digital-5  
Digital-6  
RF IN  
[DVD/LD]  
[TV/DVD]  
[
[
[
[
CD  
SAT  
DVR  
CD-R  
]
]
]
]
• The ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) hard keys select menu  
items and the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys  
change the setting of the item selected.  
[DVD/LD]  
[Return]  
3
Select ‘Input Assign’ then press ENTER.  
The Input Assign menu appears on screen:  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys to  
select the component that corresponds with the one  
you connected to that input.  
Select between DVD/LD, TV/DVD, SAT, DVR/VCR 1,  
VCR 2, VCR 3 or CD-R (however, the RF IN setting doesn't  
include CD-R).  
System Setup  
1.Input Assign  
[Auto Surround Setup]  
[ 1.Digital In ]  
[1. Input Assign ]  
[ 2.Component Video In ]  
[ 3.i.LINK In ]  
[ 4.Video Assign ]  
[2. Surround Setup ]  
[3. Expert Setup ]  
[4. THX Audio Setup ]  
[Return]  
• If you assign a digital input to a certain function (for  
example, DVD/LD) then any digital inputs previously  
assigned to that function will automatically be  
switched off.  
[Exit]  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced setup  
11  
4
When you're finished, select RETURN and press  
Assigning the i.LINK inputs  
ENTER.  
If you assign i.LINK-equipped components to an input  
(for example DVD/LD), you will be able to select both  
audio and video signals from i.LINK-equipped  
components using the INPUT button (or INPUT  
SELECTOR dial on the front panel). Assigning i.LINK  
sources also allows you to keeps the sound settings  
you’ve made for other input functions.  
You will return to the Input Assign menu.  
Assigning the component video inputs  
• Default settings:  
Component 1 DVD/LD  
Component 2 OFF  
Component 3 OFF  
1
Select ‘i.LINK Input’ from the Input Assign menu  
and press ENTER.  
If you used component video cords to connect your video  
equipment you must tell the receiver which device it is, or  
else you may see the S-video or composite video input  
instead of the component video signal.  
If no i.LINK-equipped components are connected i.LINK  
Input cannot be selected.  
1.Input Assign  
1
Select ‘Component Video In’ from the Input  
[ 1.Digital In ]  
[ 2.Component Video In ]  
[ 3.i.LINK In ]  
[ 4.Video Assign ]  
Assign menu and press ENTER.  
[Return]  
1.Input Assign  
[ 1.Digital In ]  
[ 2.Component Video In ]  
[ 3.i.LINK In ]  
[ 4.Video Assign ]  
2
Select an i.LINK-equipped component.  
When a number of i.LINK-equipped components are  
connected to your receiver, the i.LINK-equipped  
component you are looking for might be listed on  
additional display screens.  
[Return]  
2
Select the number of the component video input  
i.LINK is displayed after unassigned device names  
(e.g. DV-59AVi [i.LINK]).  
to which you’ve connected your video player.  
The numbers correspond with the numbers beside the  
inputs on the back of the receiver.  
• If a connected devices cannot output (playback) a  
source using the i.LINK connection, [- - - -] is  
displayed after the input device name (e.g. DV-59AVi  
[- - - -]). Non-compatible devices cannot be assigned  
to inputs.  
1.2. Component Video In  
Component 1 [DVD/LD ]  
Component 2  
Component 3  
[
[
OFF  
OFF  
]
]
• When the cables for an assigned input device  
become loose or the power is cut to the device, an  
asterisk (*) appears before the device name (e.g.  
*DV-59AVi [CD]).  
[Return]  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys to  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys to  
select the component that corresponds with the one  
you connected to that input.  
select the component that you want to assign.  
When you assign an i.LINK-equipped video component,  
select the input source to which you have connected the  
video signal from the component.  
• If you connect the TV monitor with component video  
cord, and the DVD player with composite or S video  
cord then you should set that terminal to OFF.  
• If you assign an i.LINK input to a certain function (for  
example DVD/LD) then any digital inputs previously  
assigned to that function will automatically be set to  
i.LINK (not assigned).  
4
When you're finished, select RETURN and press  
ENTER.  
You will return to the Input Assign menu.  
TUNER and PHONO inputs cannot be assigned.  
4
When you're finished, select RETURN and press  
ENTER.  
You will return to the Input Assign menu.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced setup  
11  
Assigning the video inputs  
The Expert Setup menu  
• Default settings:  
The settings in the Expert Setup menu are more  
advanced features of this receiver that you can use to  
make detailed adjustments when you’re more familiar  
with the system.  
MULTI IN OFF  
USB OFF  
You can choose to watch a video source at the same time  
as you listen to the audio source from the multichannel  
analog inputs or USB connector. To do this, you must let  
the receiver know which video component you want to  
watch. After making the settings below, the  
corresponding video input is selected at the same time  
that you choose either MULTI IN or USB as the input  
source.  
You only need to make these settings once (unless you  
change the placement of your current speaker system or  
add new speakers.).  
1
Make sure your receiver and TV are both  
switched on.  
2
Using the remote control, press RECEIVER on the  
touch screen, then press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
1
Select ‘Video Assign’ from the Input Assign menu  
and press ENTER.  
1.Input Assign  
HOME  
1/3  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
[ 1.Digital In ]  
[ 2.Component Video In ]  
[ 3.i.LINK Input ]  
[ 4.Video Assign ]  
INPUT  
1
2
3
TV  
/ DVD  
DVD  
/ LD  
SAT  
[Return]  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
2
Select which input to which you want to assign a  
video source.  
Choose either MULTI IN or USB.  
SETUP  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys to  
ENTER  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
select the video source you want to assign.  
Any video source available on the receiver can be  
assigned, and you can also assign the same video source  
to both inputs.  
MENU  
MUTE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
AV AMPLIFIER  
4
When you're finished, select RETURN and press  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ/ꢁ hard keys and ENTER on the remote control  
to navigate through the screens and select menu items.  
ENTER.  
You will return to the Input Assign menu.  
• The ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) hard keys select menu  
items and the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys  
change the setting of the item selected.  
3
Select ‘Expert Setup’ then press ENTER.  
System Setup  
[Auto Surround Setup]  
[1. Input Assign ]  
[2. Surround Setup ]  
[3. Expert Setup ]  
[4. THX Audio Setup ]  
[Exit]  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced setup  
11  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
Bass Peak Level  
Some audio sources (for example, Dolby Digital and DTS)  
include ultra-low bass tones. Set the bass attenuator as  
needed to prevent the ultra-low bass from distorting the  
sound.  
3.Expert Setup  
[1. OSD Adjustment ]  
[2. Bass Peak Level ]  
[3. D-Range Control ]  
[4. Function Rename ]  
[5. OSD Overlay ]  
[6. 12V Trigger ]  
1
Select ‘Bass Peak Level’ from the Expert Setup  
[7. Multi-Room Setting ]  
[Return]  
menu.  
The current setting is displayed.  
• When [- - -] is displayed, no bass is output.  
OSD Adjustment – Adjust the position of the on-  
screen display on your TV.  
• When [OFF] is displayed the attenuator is off (bass  
output is not affected).  
Bass Peak Level – Prevent bass tones from distorting  
the sound from your speakers.  
2
Select a setup option.  
D-Range Control – Specify the amount of dynamic  
range adjustment to Dolby Digital soundtracks.  
3.2. Bass Peak Level  
Manager  
Function Rename – Change the names that appear  
on the receiver display and on-screen display.  
[Setting Start]  
[Setting Cancel]  
[Return]  
OSD Overlay – Switch the on-screen display (for  
Present Level [OFF]  
basic functions) on or off.  
12V Trigger – Specify which components are  
switched on or off using the 12 volt trigger.  
Setting Start – The volume is set to MIN (----dB), a  
test tone plays back and you make the setting.  
Multi-Room Setting – Specify your volume setting  
and IR receiver type for a multi-room setup.  
Setting Cancel – Switches the attenuator off.  
5
Make the adjustments necessary for each  
3
If you selected ‘Setting Start’, use the ꢀ/ꢁ  
(cursor left/right) hard keys to adjust the test tones  
and specify the bass peak level then press ENTER.  
setting, pressing ENTER to confirm after each screen.  
When you’re finished, you can select Return, then press  
ENTER to go back to the System Setup menu.  
3.2. Bass Peak Level  
Manager  
OSD Adjustment  
Use this feature to adjust your TV display if it seems  
difficult to see all the instructions on the screen.  
[Setting OK]  
Bass Peak Level  
[–10]  
[Setting Cancel]  
1
Select ‘OSD Adjustment’ from the Expert Setup  
menu.  
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ/ꢁ hard keys to move the  
Set the bass peak level gradually, then press ENTER at  
the point just before the tone starts to distort. When  
you’re finished, the display on the receiver will show  
RESUME and the volume will return to its original  
position.  
display field around until you get one that you feel  
best suits your TV.  
You can move the screen displays up or down and left or  
right to get the best match for your TV.  
• The test tones are output at loud volumes.  
3.1. OSD Adjustment  
• If the YES or PLUS setting on the subwoofer is  
selected (in Speaker Systems on page 58), the test  
tone will only play back from the subwoofer. If not, the  
test tone will play back from all speakers set to  
LARGE (except for the subwoofer).  
[Return]  
4
When you're finished, select RETURN and press  
3
Press ENTER.  
ENTER.  
You will return to the Expert Setup menu.  
You will return to the Expert Setup menu.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced setup  
11  
3
Edit the name as necessary and press ENTER.  
Note  
3.4. Function Rename  
• Since the THX Ultra2 feature has a bass limiter to  
control bass peaks, the bass attenuator is  
DVR  
[
DVR  
]
automatically switched off if you set up your system  
using the THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Setup on page 96.  
VIDEO  
DVR  
VCR2  
VCR3  
[
[
[
[
VIDEO  
DVR  
VCR2  
VCR3  
]
]
]
]
Dynamic Range Control  
• Default setting: OFF  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) hard keys to change the  
character and the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys to  
move forward/back a position. The name can be up to ten  
characters (the possible characters are listed below).  
This setting specifies the amount of dynamic range  
adjustment to movie soundtracks. You may want to use  
this when listening to surround sound at low volumes.  
1
Select ‘D-Range Control’ from the Expert Setup  
menu.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
2 Choose the setting that you want.  
!”#$%&’()*+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]  
3.3. Dynamic Range  
Control  
Compression Level  
[MID]  
[OFF]  
3.4. Function Rename  
dts  
DVR  
[
DVR-310  
]
VIDEO  
DVR  
VCR2  
VCR3  
[
[
[
[
VIDEO  
DVR  
VCR2  
VCR3  
]
]
]
]
[Return]  
OFF – No dynamic range adjustment (use when  
listening at higher volume).  
4
Select another name to edit, or select ‘Return’  
MID – Mid setting.  
from the bottom of the list if you’re done. Press  
ENTER.  
If you’ve selected another name, repeat step 3, otherwise  
MAX – Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds are  
reduced in volume while quieter sounds are  
increased)  
you’ll return to the Expert Setup menu.  
3
When you're finished, select RETURN and press  
OSD Overlay  
• Default setting: ON  
ENTER.  
You will return to the Expert Setup menu.  
You can choose whether or not you want to see basic  
functions (such as selecting input sources) using the on-  
screen display. Only the System Setup menu and Status  
screen (Checking your system settings on page 78)  
appear on the OSD.  
Function Rename  
You can customize the names that appears on the  
display when you select an input source (for example,  
you could change the name of VCR1/DVR to DVR-310).  
1
Select ‘OSD Overlay’ from the Expert Setup  
1
Select ‘Function Rename’ from the Expert Setup  
menu.  
menu.  
2
Choose the setting that you want.  
2
Select the name of the input you want to rename  
and press ENTER.  
3. 5. OSD Overlay  
The functions are divided into three different on-screen  
displays so you may have to move through them to find  
the function you want to rename.  
Overlay  
[ON  
]
3.4. Function Rename  
[Return]  
DVD/LD  
[
DVD/LD  
]
DVD/LD  
TV  
SAT  
[
[
[
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
]
]
]
OFF – The on-screen display is switched off except for  
the System Step menu and Status screens.  
ON – The on-screen display is switched on for basic  
functions.  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced setup  
11  
3
When you're finished, select RETURN and press  
2
Select the volume level setting.  
ENTER.  
VARIABLE – Use this setting if you’ve connected a  
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is  
simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be  
using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.  
You will return to the Expert Setup menu.  
12 Volt Trigger  
FIXED – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully  
integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX  
receiver) in the sub room and want to use that  
receiver’s volume controls.  
• Default setting: OFF · OFF (all components)  
After connecting a component to one of the 12 volt  
triggers (see Switching components on and off using the  
12 volt trigger on page 74), it switches on automatically  
when you select an input function set to switch the  
trigger on. Specify which input functions switch on  
which trigger(s) below.  
3.7. Multi-Room Setting  
Volume Level  
[
IR Receiver  
VARIABLE  
]
[
PIONEER  
]
1
Select ‘12 Volt Trigger’ from the Expert Setup  
[Return]  
menu.  
CAUTION: If the "FIXED"  
position is chosen,the  
volume will be loud.  
2
Select an input function and choose the setting  
that you want.  
This should be the input function, that when selected,  
switches on one (or both) of the 12 volt triggers.  
With the FIXED setting, the source is sent from this  
receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is  
quite low in the sub room at first and then experiment to  
find the correct level.  
3.6. 12V Trigger  
3.6. 12V Trigger  
1
[OFF OFF]  
2
1
[ON OFF ]  
2
.
.
.
.
3
Select the type of IR receiver you’re using.  
PIONEER – Use this setting if you’re using a Pioneer  
MR-100 (or if the IR receiver you’re using doesn’t  
seem to work after selecting others).  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO  
DVR/VCR1  
VCR2  
DVD/LD  
TV/DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO  
DVR/VCR1  
VCR2  
[OFF OFF]  
[OFF OFF]  
.
.
[OFF OFF]  
[OFF OFF]  
.
.
[OFF OFF]  
[OFF OFF]  
.
.
[OFF OFF]  
[OFF OFF]  
.
.
[OFF OFF]  
[OFF OFF]  
.
[OFF OFF]  
.
[OFF OFF]  
VCR3  
Next)  
VCR3  
Next)  
(
(
OTHERS – Use this setting for all other IR receivers.  
OFF · OFF – 12 volt triggers 1 and 2 are switched off.  
3.7. Multi-Room Setting  
Volume Level  
OFF · ON – 12 volt trigger 1 is switched off; 12 volt  
trigger 2 is switched on.  
[
IR Receiver  
VARIABLE  
]
[
OTHERS  
]
[Return]  
ON · OFF – 12 volt trigger 1 is switched on; 12 volt  
trigger 2 is switched off.  
CAUTION: If the "FIXED"  
position is chosen,the  
volume will be loud.  
ON · ON – 12 volt triggers 1 and 2 are switched on.  
3
Repeat for as many input functions as you would  
4
Select ‘Return’ then press ENTER to finish.  
like to set.  
You will return to the Expert Setup menu.  
4
When you're finished, select RETURN and press  
ENTER.  
Note  
You will return to the Expert Setup menu.  
• Some IR receivers may not work with this receiver.  
Check with your audio dealer for more information.  
Multi-Room Setting  
• Default setting: VARIABLE / PIONEER  
If you’ve made multi-room connections (see Multi-room  
setup on page 83) you may need to specify your volume  
setting and IR receiver type.  
1
Select ‘Multi-Room Setting’ then press ENTER.  
3.Expert Setup  
[1. OSD Adjustment ]  
[2. Bass Peak Level ]  
[3. D-Range Control ]  
[4. Function Rename ]  
[5. OSD Overlay ]  
[6. 12V Trigger ]  
[7. Multi-Room Setting ]  
[Return]  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced setup  
THX Audio Setup  
11  
THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Setup  
With some speaker setups, depending on the position of  
the subwoofer and the walls in your listening area, you  
may experience overly resonant frequencies in the bass.  
If you have this problem use the THX Ultra2 subwoofer  
setup to switch on boundary gain compensation (see  
About THX® on page 109 for more on this).  
The settings in the THX Audio Setup menu allow you to  
get optimum sound from the Home THX modes (on  
page 45) if you’re using a subwoofer and surround back  
speakers with your home theater system. See THX  
speaker system setup on page 98 for more on this.  
To access the THX Audio Setup menu, follow the steps  
below.  
1
Select ‘Ultra2 SW Setup’ from the THX Audio  
Setup menu.  
1
Make sure your receiver and TV are both  
switched on.  
2
Specify whether your subwoofer is THX Ultra2  
certified or not.  
2
Using the remote control, press RECEIVER on the  
If your subwoofer isn’t THX Ultra2 certified, but you still  
want to switch boundary gain compensation on, select  
YES here, but the effect might not work properly.  
touch screen, then press the SYSTEM SETUP button.  
3
Select either ON or OFF for the Boundary Gain  
Compensation setting.  
HOME  
1/3  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
4
When you're finished, select RETURN and press  
INPUT  
1
2
3
ENTER.  
TV  
/ DVD  
DVD  
/ LD  
SAT  
You will return to the THX Audio Setup menu.  
DVR  
/ VCR1  
CD  
TUNER  
Surround Back Speaker Position  
TV  
CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
For the most effective results when using the THX Ultra2  
Cinema and THX MusicMode listening modes (see Using  
the Home THX modes on page 45) with the Advanced  
Speaker Array (ASA) system (see About THX® on  
page 109), it is required that you make the setting below.  
SETUP  
ENTER  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
MUTE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
Note  
AV AMPLIFIER  
• If you don't have surround back speakers, or just have  
one, you won't be able to select this setting.  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢀ/ꢁ hard keys and ENTER on the remote control  
to navigate through the screens and select menu items.  
1
Select ‘SB SP Position’ from the THX Audio Setup  
menu.  
• The ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) hard keys select menu  
items and the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor left/right) hard keys  
change the setting of the item selected.  
2
Specify the distance of your surround back  
speakers from each other.  
0–1 ft – Surround speakers within 1 foot apart (best  
for THX surround sound).  
3
Select ‘THX Audio Setup’ then press ENTER.  
<1–4 ft – Surround speakers between 1 and 4 feet  
apart.  
System Setup  
[Auto Surround Setup]  
4 ft< – Surround speakers more than 4 feet apart.  
[1. Input Assign ]  
3
When you're finished, select RETURN and press  
[2. Surround Setup ]  
[3. Expert Setup ]  
[4. THX Audio Setup ]  
ENTER.  
You will return to the THX Audio Setup menu.  
[Exit]  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Chapter 12  
Additional information  
Optimizing your speaker setup  
In addition to the speaker placement tips outlined in  
Placing the speakers on page 27, you can use the  
diagrams and explanations provided below as a  
reference for optimum placement of each set of  
speakers.  
Surround and surround back speakers should be  
positioned a foot-and-a-half to three feet (60 cm–90 cm)  
higher than your ears and titled slight downward. Make  
sure the speakers don't face each other. For DVD-Audio,  
the speakers should be more directly behind the listener  
than for home theater playback.  
Basic surround setup  
If you're using a center speaker, place the front speakers  
at a wider angle. If not, place them at a narrower angle.  
No surround back speakers  
90~120  
C
F R  
F L  
RS  
RS  
LS  
45~60  
LS  
Make sure the center speaker does not cross the line  
formed by the leading edge of the front left and right  
speakers.  
One surround back speaker  
90~120  
LS  
C
F R  
F L  
RS  
RS  
LS  
S B  
It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening  
position. The angle depends on the size of the room. Use  
less of an angle for bigger rooms.  
Two surround back speakers  
C
RS  
LS  
0~60  
SBL  
SBR  
SBL  
SBR  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
THX speaker system setup  
If you have a complete THX speaker system, follow the  
diagram below to place your speakers. Note that the  
surround speakers ( indicates bi-polar radiating  
speakers) should output at an angle parallel to the  
listener.  
Note  
• If you connect an alternate set of surround speakers,  
you can use speaker system B to provide additional  
surround sound options when listening to  
multichannel music sources. See Alternating  
surround speaker setups using speaker system B (ITU-  
R) on page 80 for how to set it up.  
FL  
C
FR  
• If you’re using two surround back speakers, you can  
select the STANDARD SX listening mode during  
DVD-Audio playback to simulate the sound achieved  
from the setup shown in the diagram above. The  
sound from the surround and surround back  
speakers are combined to create a virtual surround  
speaker.  
LS  
RS  
Surround  
Surround  
SBL  
SBR  
Surround back  
If you have two surround back speakers THX  
recommends placing them together and the same  
distance from your listening position so you can take  
advantage of the ASA feature. For more details see  
Advanced Speaker Array™ (ASA) on page 110.  
See also THX Audio Setup on page 96 to make the settings  
that will give you the best sound experience when using  
the Home THX modes (on page 45).  
Speaker system setup for DVD-Audio/  
multichannel music sources  
The best speaker placement for DVD-Audio (and other  
multichannel music sources) may be different than for  
regular DVD discs. For these formats, some sound  
studios use the setup shown in the diagram below (as  
recommended by ITU-R) instead of the setups in Basic  
surround setup on page 97.  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Troubleshooting  
12  
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with  
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other  
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks  
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.  
Power  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
The power does not turn on.  
• The power plug is disconnected.  
• Connect the power plug to the wall outlet.  
• The protection circuit may have been  
activated.  
• Disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and insert  
again.  
• Something is obstructing the rear panel fan. • Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer-  
authorized independent service company.  
The receiver suddenly switches • The speaker wires are frayed or sticking out • Reinsert the speaker wires, making sure there are no  
off.  
of the jack, and are touching the back of the stray strands of wire and that they are inserted fully.  
receiver or another set of wires.  
• The receiver has a serious problem.  
• Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer-  
authorized independent service company.  
During loud playback the power • The protection circuit has been activated  
Turn down the volume.  
suddenly switches off.  
because the lowest actual impedance of the • When its convenient, go to Acoustic Calibration EQ on  
speakers (as opposed to the speakers rated  
impedance) is dangerously low.  
page 61 and lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels  
using the manual setting.  
Turning the digital safety feature on may allow you to  
turn up the volume a little more. To switch between  
SAFETY 1 (medium effect), SAFETY 2 (more effect) and  
SAFETY OFF, put the receiver into standby, then press the  
STANDBY/ON button while holding down the OPTION  
button on the front panel. If the power switches off even  
with SAFETY 2 switched on, turn down the volume.  
AMP ERR blinks in the display,  
then the power automatically  
switches off.  
• The receiver has a serious problem.  
• After about a minute (you won’t be able to switch the  
unit on during this time), switch the receiver back on. If  
the message persists, call a Pioneer-authorized  
independent service company.  
FAN STOP blinks in the display, • Something is obstructing the rear panel fan. • Remove the obstruction and try switching the receiver  
then the power automatically  
switches off.  
back on. If the fan is still not working, or you can’t remove  
the object, unplug the receiver from the wall and call a  
Pioneer-authorized independent service company.  
• The fan is malfunctioning.  
• Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer-  
authorized independent service company.  
OVERHEAT blinks in the display • The internal temperature of the unit has  
and no sound is output. become too high.  
• After allowing the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated  
place, try switching the receiver back on. Make sure you  
follow the guidelines for improving heat dispersal in  
Ventilation on page 8.  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
No sound  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
No sound is output when an  
input source is selected.  
• Improper connections.  
• Make sure you have properly connected the component  
to the corresponding input on the back of the receiver  
(see Connecting your equipment on page 14).  
• Sound is muted or the volume is turned  
down.  
• Press MUTE or adjust the volume accordingly.  
• The TAPE 2 monitoring feature is on.  
• Press TAPE 2 MONITOR to switch it off (see Monitoring  
your recording on page 75).  
• Speakers are turned off or selected  
• Press SP SYSTEM A/B to select the proper speaker set  
improperly with the SP SYSTEM A/B switch. (see Switching the speaker system on page 80).  
• The input signal type is incorrect.  
• Press SIGNAL SELECT to select the proper input signal  
(see Selecting the input signal type on page 48).  
• The i.LINK source selected for the main  
room has also been selected as a source in  
the sub room.  
• Choose a different source or choose a different input  
signal for the main room, such as DIGITAL or ANALOG  
(see Selecting the input signal type on page 48).  
No sound output from the front • The U-shaped connectors that connect the • Reconnect the POWER AMP IN terminals to the front  
speakers.  
POWER AMP IN terminals to the front  
channel pre outs are not connected.  
channel pre-outs using the supplied U-shaped connectors  
(see item 8 in Rear panel on page 14).  
• The front speakers are connected to the B • Connect the front speakers to the A speaker system  
speaker system jack.  
jacks (see Installing your speaker system on page 26).  
No sound from the surround or • Speaker settings are incorrect. (for  
• Check you speaker settings in Speaker Systems on  
page 58.  
center speakers.  
example, they have been set to NO).  
• The surround and/or center levels are  
turned down.  
• Check the levels in Channel Level on page 60.  
• The surround and/or center speakers are  
disconnected.  
• Check Installing your speaker system on page 26 to  
make sure the speakers are connected correctly.  
• The STEREO listening mode has been  
selected.  
• Choose a surround listening mode (see Listening in  
surround sound on page 43).  
• Speaker system B is selected.  
• Select speaker system A (see Switching the speaker  
system on page 80).  
• The 2 channel input setting is selected  
when using the multichannel analog inputs  
or the USB interface.  
• Change the setting accordingly (see Selecting USB and  
multichannel analog input channels on page 49).  
No sound from surround back  
speakers.  
• Surround back speakers are set to NO.  
• Set the surround back speakers to LARGE or SMALL  
(see Speaker Systems on page 58).  
• The SB CH mode is switched off.  
• Set the surround back channel to SB CH ON (see  
page 50).  
• The source is not a 6.1 channel playback  
source.  
• Choose an Advanced surround listening mode (see  
Listening in surround sound on page 43).  
• The surround back speakers are  
disconnected.  
• Check Installing your speaker system on page 26 to  
make sure the speakers are connected correctly.  
• The surround back channel is on the 1  
speaker setting, and your speaker is  
connected to the right channel output.  
• Connect the speaker to the surround back left channel  
output (Installing your speaker system on page 26).  
• The wrong input setting is selected when  
using the multichannel analog inputs or the multichannel analog input channels on page 49).  
USB interface.  
• Change the setting accordingly (see Selecting USB and  
• The SB CH MODE is switched to AUTO and • You can still listen with surround back sound by setting  
the Dolby Surround EX / DTS ES software  
you’re playing has no flag to indicate it is 6.1  
compatible.  
the surround back channel to SB CH ON (page 50).  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
No sound from subwoofer.  
• The subwoofer is disconnected or switched • Connect or switch on the subwoofer (see Installing your  
off.  
speaker system on page 26).  
• The subwoofer's settings are incorrect.  
• Set the subwoofer (see Speaker Systems on page 58).  
• Set the front speakers to SMALL (see Speaker Systems  
on page 58).  
• The crossover frequency is set too low.  
• Set the crossover frequency to a (higher) frequency that  
matches your speaker characteristics (see Speaker  
Systems on page 58)  
• The bass attenuator is set too low.  
• The subwoofer's levels are too low.  
• See Bass Peak Level on page 93 to adjust the setting.  
• See Channel Level on page 60 to check the speaker  
levels.  
• Check the volume control on the subwoofer to make  
sure it is turned up.  
No sound from one speaker.  
• The speaker setting has been set to NO.  
• The speaker level is too low.  
• Change the setting in Speaker Systems on page 58.  
• Check the level in Channel Level on page 60.  
• The speaker isn’t connected properly.  
• Check Installing your speaker system on page 26 to  
make sure the speaker is connected correctly.  
• The source has no sound output for that  
channel.  
• By choosing an Advanced surround listening mode (see  
Listening in surround sound on page 43), you may be able  
to create an extra channel for the speaker.  
The program indicator lights for • A mute signal is recorded on the channel.  
a channel, but no sound is  
output from the corresponding  
speaker.  
Sound is produced from analog • The digital input assignment is wrong.  
components, but not from digital  
• Assign the digital inputs correctly (see Assigning the  
digital inputs on page 90).  
ones (DVD, LD, CD-ROM etc.).  
• The digital components aren't connected  
• Make sure you have properly connected the digital  
component to the corresponding input on the back of the  
receiver (see Connecting your equipment on page 14).  
properly.  
• The player is not compatible with the source • Choose a compatible source, or check the component’s  
you're using, or the player settings are  
incorrect.  
manual for the correct settings.  
• The digital output level has been turned  
down on a CD player or other component  
equipped with digital output level adjustment  
capability.  
• Set the digital volume level of the player to full, or to the  
neutral position.  
• Analog input has been selected.  
• Select digital input (see Selecting the input signal type  
on page 48).  
When playing an LD the input  
signal type is 2RF but there is  
still no sound.  
The LD is not a Dolby Digital compatible disc. • Set the input signal to AUTO (see Selecting the input  
signal type on page 48). Also make sure your LD player is  
hooked up with analog connections in addition to digital  
and 2RF connections (see Connecting other video  
sources on page 21).  
No sound output from the  
headphones.  
The U-shaped connectors that connect the  
POWER AMP IN terminals to the front  
channel pre-outs are not connected.  
• Reconnect the POWER AMP IN terminals to the front  
channel pre-outs using the supplied U-shaped connectors  
(see item 8 in Rear panel on page 14).  
No sound is output or a noise is • A DVD player not compatible with Dolby  
• Make sure your DVD player is compatible with Dolby  
Digital/DTS.  
output when Dolby Digital/DTS  
software is played back.  
Digital/DTS is being used.  
• The settings on the DVD player are incorrect • Make sure the player's settings are correct and/or the  
and/or the DTS signal output is turned off.  
DTS signal out is on. Refer to the instruction manual  
supplied with the DVD player.  
• The digital output level is turned down on a • Set the digital volume level of the player to full, or to the  
CD player or other component equipped with neutral position.  
digital output level adjustment capability. (The  
DTS signal has been altered by the player, and  
cannot be read.)  
No sound is output when the  
AM/FM is selected.  
• Incorrect frequency.  
Tune into the correct frequency.  
• The antenna is not connected.  
• Connect the antenna (see Connecting antennas on  
page 28).  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
No digital output from the DVD • DVD players do not output digital audio  
To enjoy fully multichannel DVD-Audio and SACD discs,  
connect your DVD player to this receiver through the  
multichannel analog inputs. See Connecting the  
multichannel analog outputs on page 18 and also the  
operating instructions that came with your DVD player.  
player when playing a  
multichannel DVD-Audio or  
SACD disc.  
when playing these kinds of discs.  
No digital output when playing a • DVD players do not output digital audio at • This is not a malfunction. To enjoy fully these discs,  
192/176.4 kHz sampling rate  
DVD-Audio disc.  
these sampling rates. Usually, players output connect your DVD player to this receiver through the  
the audio from these discs at a downsampled multichannel analog inputs. See Connecting the  
rate of 96/88.2 kHz or 48/44.1 kHz. Some discs multichannel analog outputs on page 18 and also the  
prohibit all digital output.  
operating instructions that came with your DVD player.  
During playback of a Dolby  
Surround EX / DTS ES  
• The listening mode is not set correctly.  
• Set the surround back channel to SB CH AUTO (see  
Using the surround back channel on page 50).  
soundtrack, the LS, S and RS  
indicators light but there is no  
surround back channel sound.  
Other audio problems  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
Broadcast stations cannot be  
selected automatically, or there • The FM antenna is not fully extended or is  
seems to be considerable noise poorly positioned.  
FM broadcasts  
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best  
reception, and secure to a wall.  
in radio broadcasts.  
• Weak radio signals.  
• Connect an outdoor FM antenna (see page 28).  
AM broadcasts  
• The AM antenna is poorly positioned.  
• Adjust the direction and position for best reception.  
• Weak radio signals.  
• Connect an additional internal or external AM antenna  
(see page 28).  
• Interference caused by other equipment  
(fluorescent lamp, motor, etc.).  
Turn off the equipment causing the noise or move it  
away from the receiver.  
• Place the antenna farther away from the equipment  
causing the noise.  
Noise is output when scanning a • The scan function performed by the player • This is not a malfunction, but be sure to turn the volume  
DTS CD. slightly alters the digital information, making down to prevent the output of loud noise from your  
it unreadable.  
speakers.  
When playing a 96 kHz/24bit disc • Different discs have different recording  
Turn the volume down.  
the sound is too loud.  
levels so some may be louder than others.  
When playing a DTS format LD  
there is audible noise on the  
soundtrack.  
• The input signal type is set to ANALOG.  
• Set the input signal type to DIGITAL (see Selecting the  
input signal type on page 48)  
Can't record audio.  
• You are trying to make an analog recording •You can only record analog to analog, or digital to digital.  
from a digital signal, or a digital recording of  
an analog source.  
• The digital source is copy protected.  
• You can't record digital sources that have been copy  
protected.  
• The analog REC jacks have not been  
connected properly.  
• Check your analog connections (see Connecting analog  
audio sources on page 24).  
The sound distorts and/or the  
OVER indicator won’t stop  
lighting.  
• The analog signal is too strong.  
Turn on input attenuator (see Reducing the level of an  
analog signal on page 76).  
• If the source has an analog output setting, lower it as  
necessary.  
You can only hear treble from  
speakers.  
• The front speakers are set to SMALL.  
• Set the front speakers to LARGE (see Speaker Systems  
on page 58).  
Subwoofer output is very low.  
• The speaker settings result in very little  
audio signal being sent to the subwoofer.  
To route more audio signal to the subwoofer, set it to  
PLUS, or select SMALL for the front speaker setting (see  
Speaker Systems on page 58).  
Everything seems to be set up  
correctly, but the playback sound  
is odd.  
• The speakers are out of phase.  
• Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on  
the receiver are matched with the corresponding  
terminals on the speakers (page 26).  
Noise or hum can be heard even • There is electrical interference from another • Check that personal computers or other digital  
when there is no sound being  
input.  
component or appliance.  
components connected to the same power source are not  
causing interference.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Video  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
No image is output when an  
input is selected.  
• The video connections are incorrect.  
• Make sure the video component is connected correctly  
(see pages 17–21).  
• You are using component video  
• Using the video converter, video signals can be  
connections for your source, but not for your converted from a composite or S-video input to a  
TV.  
component video output, but not vice-versa. See About the  
video converter on page 22 for more on this.  
• You are using component video  
• Check Assigning the component video inputs on page 91  
connections and the component video inputs to make sure you’re assigned the correct input.  
are assigned incorrectly.  
• The DVD/video player settings are incorrect. • Set correctly. Refer to the instruction manual supplied  
with the DVD/video player.  
• The video input selected on the TV monitor • Set correctly. Refer to the instruction manual supplied  
is incorrect.  
with the TV.  
The System Setup screen  
doesn't appear.  
• The MONITOR OUT jack hasn't been  
connected.  
• Connect the MONITOR OUT jack to the TV monitor (see  
Connecting your TV on page 16).  
• Some TVs connected to the receiver with  
component video cords do not display the  
• When the receiver is in standby, switch to COLOR  
BURST OFF by holding down the VIDEO SELECT button  
System Setup screen when the Color Burst and pressing STANDBY/ON. (the current setting  
feature is on.  
appears in the display). The multi-room control must be  
switched off to do this.  
Color noise appears on the  
System Setup screen.  
• Some TVs connected to the receiver with  
composite video cords display color noise on BURST ON by holding down the VIDEO SELECT button  
• When the receiver is in standby, switch to COLOR  
the System Setup screen when the Color  
Burst feature is off.  
and pressing STANDBY/ON (the current setting  
appears in the display). The multi-room control must be  
switched off to do this.  
Overlay information doesn’t  
appear on your TV or monitor.  
• Overlay information doesn’t appear when  
you are using different types of video cords for see overlay information and use the same type of video  
source and TV connections, or when using  
component video connections.  
• Do not use component video cables if you would like to  
cable (for example, only composite, or only S-video) for  
both source and TV connections.  
Can’t see or hear television  
programs.  
• The video input selected on the TV monitor • Set the TV input to the channel you want to watch,  
is incorrect.  
instead of the receiver input.  
There is residual screen noise  
after an overlay message  
disappears.  
• Some TVs exhibit this display problem.  
• This is not a malfunction with this receiver.  
Can’t record video.  
• You are trying to record a source connected • Connect the source component to either the composite  
to the component video jacks.  
video or the S video jacks (see Connecting your equipment  
on page 14).  
• The source is copy protected.  
• You can't record sources that have been copy protected.  
Settings  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
The Auto Surround Setup  
continually shows an error.  
• The ambient noise level in the room is too  
high.  
• Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible  
when using the Auto Surround Setup. If the noise cannot  
be kept low enough, you will have to set up the surround  
sound manually (page 57).  
After using the Auto Surround  
Setup, the subwoofer distance  
setting is set further than the  
actual measured distance.  
• The low-pass filter found in subwoofers can • This is not a malfunction. The Auto Surround Setup has  
introduce a delay in the playback sound.  
compensated for the delay caused by the filter.  
After using the Auto Surround  
Setup, the speaker size setting  
(LARGE or SMALL) is incorrect.  
• There was some inaudible low-frequency  
noise in the room.  
• The low-frequency noise could have been caused by an  
air conditioner or motor. Switch off all appliances in the  
room and rerun the Auto Surround Setup.  
The display shows KEY LOCK  
ON when you try to make  
settings.  
• Your Pioneer dealer has enabled the key  
lock feature.  
• Ask your Pioneer dealer to disable the key lock.  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Remote control  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
The receiver cannot be remote  
controlled.  
• You are too far away or at a bad angle for  
operation.  
• Operate within 23 ft., 30° of the remote sensor on the  
front panel (see Using the remote control on page 9).  
• There is an obstacle between the receiver  
and the remote control.  
• Remove the obstacle or operate from another angle of  
position.  
• Strong light such as fluorescent light.  
• Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to  
direct light.  
• The remote control has a weak charge.  
• Recharge the remote control (see Recharging the remote  
control on page 9). You can also use the remote while it’s  
placed on the recharger.  
• The remote control is locked.  
• Unlock the remote control (see Locking the remote  
control on page 12).  
• The CONTROL IN jack has been hooked up. • Disconnect the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other  
Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 74).  
• The IR-receiver does not correspond with  
• Change the setting to correspond with your IR-receiver  
the type specified in the multi-room settings. (Multi-Room Setting on page 95).  
Other components cannot be  
remote controlled.  
• The proper code hasn't been input into the • Input the proper code into the remote control (see  
remote control to control that component.  
page 67).  
• Something is plugged into the CONTROL IN • Either point remote at the remote sensor of the unit that  
jack.  
is plugged into the CONTROL IN jack or unplug the cable  
from the CONTROL IN jack and use remote normally (see  
Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s  
sensor on page 74).  
The remote control doesn’t seem • The remote control hasn’t been seated  
• Reseat it on the recharger, making sure to align the  
indent on the bottom of the remote with the tabs on the  
recharger.  
to recharge properly (the  
properly on the recharger.  
recharge indicator doesn’t light),  
or it won’t hold a charge.  
• The battery cells need to be replaced.  
• See Replacing the lithium-ion batteries on page 12.  
The remote control display is  
flashing LOW BATTERY or is  
blank.  
• The remote control needs to be recharged. • Place the remote control on the recharger. If the remote  
hasn’t been charged for awhile, the remote control display  
may remain blank for several minutes before the touch  
screen appears. See Recharging the remote control on  
page 9 for more on this.  
The remote control display is  
blank or very hard to see.  
• The remote control contrast needs to be  
adjusted.  
• Use the contrast control on the right-hand side of the  
remote to adjust the contrast as necessary.  
• The remote control backlight is switched on • Switch the backlight off.  
in a bright room.  
When you press an input select • The Direct Function feature for the  
• See Remote Direct function on page 70 to switch it on  
button on the Home menu  
screen, the receiver input source  
doesn’t change to the selected  
function.  
component you want to select is switched off. again.  
Can’t program certain buttons  
with remote signals when using learn commands.  
the learning feature.  
• You have selected a button that cannot  
• Select another button that can learn commands (see  
Programming signals from other remote controls on  
page 69).  
• You have already selected a button for  
learning.  
• Press the same button again to deselect it or press END  
to go back a screen (see Programming signals from other  
remote controls on page 69).  
The display changes after  
selecting a button when using  
the learning feature.  
• You have selected a button that accesses a • These buttons cannot be programmed (see  
menu.  
Programming signals from other remote controls on  
page 69).  
The SR cable is connected, but • The SR cable hasn't been connected  
the connected components can’t properly.  
be operated with the remote.  
• Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it’s connected to the  
right jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with  
this unit’s sensor on page 74).  
• The rest of the component connections  
have not been made.  
• Make sure an analog connection has been made  
between the units.  
• The component you have hooked up is not a • This feature only works with Pioneer products.  
Pioneer product.  
The remote control touch screen • The remote control display has frozen  
doesn’t respond. (stopped operating).  
• Restart the remote control (see Restarting the remote  
control on page 12).  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
The date and time have suddenly • The remote control is low on batteries and • Reset the clock (see Setting the clock on page 10).  
changed.  
reset the date automatically.  
• The date was cleared after restarting the  
remote control.  
• Reset the clock (see Setting the clock on page 10).  
Display  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
The display is dark or off.  
• The display is set to dark or off.  
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to  
select a different brightness.  
After making an adjustment the • The display is set to off.  
display goes off.  
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to  
select a different brightness.  
You can't get DIGITAL or 2RF to • There is a problem with the digital  
display when using the SIGNAL connections or the digital input is assigned  
• Check your digital connections and/or assign the digital  
inputs correctly (see Assigning the digital inputs on  
page 90).  
SELECT button.  
incorrectly.  
• The TAPE 2 monitoring feature is on.  
• Press TAPE 2 MONITOR to switch it off (see Monitoring  
your recording on page 75).  
• You’ve selected an unassigned i.LINK  
source input.  
• Select the correct source input or assign your i.LINK  
connections correctly (see Assigning the i.LINK inputs on  
page 91).  
The Dolby/DTS indicator doesn't • The player is paused.  
light when playing Dolby/DTS  
• Press play.  
• The player's sound output settings are  
• Set the player correctly (consult the manual that came  
with the player, if necessary).  
software.  
wrong.  
When playing a DVD-Audio CD, • The audio from these discs is output from  
• This is not a malfunction. See also the operating  
the DVD player display shows 96 the analog audio jacks of the DVD player only; instructions that came with your DVD player.  
kHz. However, the receiver’s  
display does not.  
the receiver does not show the sampling rate  
of the input signal through the analog inputs.  
During playback of a DTS 96/24 • The source is being downsampled.  
source, the display doesn't show  
96kHz.  
• See Listening to dual mono soundtracks on page 53 for  
several different ways listen to sources without  
downsampling.  
• One of the DIGITAL NR, MIDNIGHT or  
LOUDNESS features are switched on.  
Turn it/them off by pressing the corresponding button  
on the remote control or front panel.  
When playing Dolby Digital or  
DTS sources, the receiver’s  
format indicators do not light.  
• No digital connection, or the digital  
connection is incorrect.  
• Check the digital audio connection (page 17).  
• The receiver’s input signal type is set to  
analog.  
• Set the receiver to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Selecting the  
input signal type on page 48).  
• The DVD player is set to output Dolby Digital • Check the settings on the player. Set the output for  
and/or DTS audio as PCM.  
Dolby Digital and DTS (no PCM conversion). See also the  
operating instructions that came with your DVD player.  
• The disc has several playback audio tracks; • Switch the playback audio channel on your DVD player.  
the one currently playing is actually PCM.  
See the operating instructions that came with your DVD  
player.  
When playing certain discs,  
none of the receiver’s format  
indicators light.  
• The audio format of the disc is not 5.1/6.1  
channel.  
• This is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for  
details of the audio formats available on the disc.  
When playing a disc, the  
2Pro Logic II or Neo:6  
indicator lights on the receiver.  
• The input signal type is set to analog.  
• Set the receiver to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Selecting the  
input signal type on page 48).  
• A 2 channel soundtrack is currently playing. • This is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for  
details of the audio formats available on the disc.  
• The soundtrack currently playing is  
encoded using Dolby Surround.  
• This is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for  
details of the audio formats available on the disc.  
During playback of a Surround  
EX or DTS ES source on the  
Stream Direct or SB CH AUTO  
setting, the EX and ES indicators  
don’t light, or the signal is not  
properly processed.  
•The source may be Dolby Surround EX / DTS • Switch the surround back channel setting (page 50) to  
ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is SB CH ON then switch to the THX Surround EX or  
6.1 compatible.  
Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround  
sound on page 43).  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
i.LINK interface  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
No sound is output.  
• An output signal is not produced from the • Refer to the manual that came with the source player.  
i.LINK connector on the source player.  
• The selected component is not compatible • Refer to the manual that came with the source player.  
with i.LINK audio.  
• The input signal is set to 2RF, DIGITAL or • Select i.LINK or AUTO using the SIGNAL SELECT  
ANALOG.  
button (see Selecting the input signal type on page 48).  
i.LINK indicator does not light up • The 2RF, DIGITAL or ANALOG input  
• Select i.LINK or AUTO using the SIGNAL SELECT  
button (see Selecting the input signal type on page 48).  
even when an i.LINK-equipped  
component is selected.  
signal is selected.  
The program format indicators  
don’t disappear when SACD  
playback stops.  
• The program format indicators remain lit  
until another format source is input.  
• This is not a malfunction.  
Turn on the component(s).  
You cant get i.LINK to display  
• i.LINK-equipped component(s) are not  
when using the SIGNAL SELECT ready.  
button.  
• i.LINK input setting is incorrect.  
• Select the correct i.LINK input setting (see Assigning  
the i.LINK inputs on page 91).  
After upgrading a component, it • Depending on the upgrade process, certain • You may need to reset the i.LINK database memory in  
is not recognized and cannot be components may cease to be recognized by the receiver:  
selected using the i.LINK  
connection.  
the receiver.  
With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/ON  
while holding down OPTION+. When you see DB CLEAR?  
appear in the display, press OPTION–, then OPTION+  
again to confirm. When you’ve reset the i.LINK database  
memory, DB CLEAR SET shows in the display.  
i.LINK messages  
You may see the following messages displayed in the front panel display when using the i.LINK interface.  
Message  
Explanation  
BUS FULL  
The i.LINK bus has reached its capacity and cannot transmit any more data.  
CANNOT LINK 1  
The connection between the receiver and the selected i.LINK-equipped component is unstable. If the  
i.LINK cables appear to be connected properly and both the receiver and i.LINK-equipped component are  
on, switch both units off, then on again to re-establish the connection between them.  
CANNOT LINK 2  
LINK CHECK  
LOOP CONNECT  
NO NAME  
The receiver can’t identify the selected i.LINK-equipped component. For example, the receiver may not be  
able to identify an i.LINK-equipped personal computer.  
The receiver is checking the i.LINK network. It does this when components are added to, or removed from  
the network. The sound may be interrupted if this happens during playback.  
The i.LINK network cannot function because the connected components form a loop. See Creating an  
i.LINK network on page 86 for more on this.  
When an i.LINK-equipped component has no name, this message is displayed instead of the proper  
component name.  
NO SIGNAL  
A component is outputting an i.LINK signal that the receiver cannot reproduce. This receiver can only  
reproduce signals from i.LINK-Audio-equipped components. See About i.LINK on page 86 for more on  
this.  
PQLS OFF  
PQLS ON  
This is displayed when PQLS turns off during playback. The sound may be interrupted momentarily when  
this happens.  
This is displayed when PQLS turns on during playback. The sound may be interrupted momentarily when  
this happens.  
UNKNOWN  
When an i.LINK-equipped component name cannot be recognized, this message is displayed instead of  
the proper component name.  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
USB interface  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
No sound.  
• The computer settings are incorrect.  
• Make sure you have set up your computer system to  
output through the USB interface (see Using the USB  
interface on page 87).  
• The software or source material you are  
using is not compatible with USB output.  
• Update to a more recent version of your existing  
software, try a different audio program, or try a different  
source.  
• The volume control on your computer is set Turn up the volume on your computer.  
too low.  
No sound from one or more  
channels.  
• The software settings are incorrect, or the  
program you are using cannot output  
multichannel audio.  
• Try changing the software settings. If this doesn’t work,  
update to a more recent version of your existing software,  
or try a different audio program.  
• The wrong input setting is selected for the • Change the setting accordingly (see Selecting USB and  
USB interface.  
multichannel analog input channels on page 49).  
Miscellaneous  
Symptom  
Cause  
Remedy  
The receiver doesn’t seem to  
respond when the buttons are  
pressed.  
• Static electricity caused by dry air.  
• Switch the power off then on again. If this doesn’t seem  
to work, try disconnecting the power plug from the outlet,  
and insert again.  
One of the Home THX 7.1  
• There is only one surround back speaker  
• Make sure there are two surround back speakers  
channel modes is selected, but connected or the current settings are for only connected (see Connecting the speakers on page 26) and  
there are certain options that  
can't be chosen.  
one surround back speaker.  
make the necessary settings in Speaker Systems on  
page 58.  
There seems to be a time lag  
between the speakers and the  
output of the subwoofer.  
• The subwoofer channel can be delayed  
slightly if run through a low-pass filter.  
• See Automatically setting up for surround sound on  
page 39 to set up your system again using MCACC (this  
will automatically compensate for a delay in the  
subwoofer output).  
The receiver doesn’t memorize  
the last volume level you used  
before switching it off.  
• The receiver was switched off immediately • Make sure to switch off the receiver two seconds or  
after changing the volume level. more after changing the volume.  
The receiver doesn’t memorize  
the last adjustments you made  
before switching it off.  
• The receiver was switched off immediately • Make sure to switch off the receiver two seconds or  
after changing the receiver status. more after changing the receiver status.  
Note  
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external  
effects such as static electricity, disconnect the  
power plug from the outlet and insert again to return  
to normal operating conditions.  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Surround sound formats  
12  
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds  
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,  
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for  
enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.  
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound  
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and  
terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
"Dolby", "Pro Logic", “Surround EX” and the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby  
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See  
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.  
DTS  
The DTS technologies are explained below. See  
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding  
system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD  
and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six  
discrete audio channels, comprising five full range  
channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects)  
channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects;  
hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby Digital.  
DTS Digital Surround  
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding  
system from Digital Theater Systems Inc. now widely  
used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital  
broadcasts, and video games. It can deliver up to six  
discrete audio channels, comprising five full range  
channels, including an LFE channel. Higher sound  
quality is achieved through the use of a low compression  
rate, and high rates of transmittance during playback.  
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital  
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,  
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit  
rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog  
Normalization, attenuates programs based on the  
average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak  
level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve  
uniform playback level.  
DTS-ES  
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a  
decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES  
Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.  
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with  
a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel.  
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed  
into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are  
also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel  
decoder.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX  
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended)  
is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a  
surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/  
right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for  
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as  
well as for pure decoding using Dolby Digital EX.  
DTS Neo:6  
DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound  
from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV)  
and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel  
information already encoded into the source, as well as  
its own processing to determine channel localization  
(with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is  
generated by bass management in the receiver). Two  
modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS  
Neo:6 with two channel sources.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby  
Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using  
the innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system  
extracts surround sound from sources as follows:  
Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono  
surround) from any stereo source  
Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo  
surround) from any stereo source  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound  
(stereo surround and surround back) from two  
channel or 5.1 channel sources  
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is  
generated by bass management in the receiver.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
DTS 96/24  
THX Cinema™ processing  
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital  
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz / 24-bit audio  
using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully  
backward compatible with all existing decoders. This  
means that DVD players can play this software using a  
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.  
THX engineers developed patented technologies to  
accurately translate the sound from the movie theater  
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and  
spatial errors that occur. When the THX indicator shows  
in the display, THX features are automatically added in  
Cinema modes (see Using the Home THX modes on  
page 45).  
“DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround”, “DTS 96/24” and  
“Neo:6” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Re-Equalization™  
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively  
bright and harsh when played back over audio  
equipment in the home because film soundtracks were  
designed to be played back in large movie theaters using  
very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization  
restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie  
soundtrack in a small home environment.  
Windows Media® Audio 9 Professional  
Windows Media® Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a  
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft  
Corporation.  
Timbre Matching™  
This feature filters the sound going to the surround  
speakers so that it more closely matches the sound  
coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless  
panning between the front and surround speakers.  
WMA9 Pro can support up to 5.1/7.1 channel playback  
with sampling rates up to 24-bit/96kHz. Using the unique  
WMA compression techniques, WMA9 Pro can deliver  
multichannel music and soundtracks over high-speed  
internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio  
degradation. Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows  
Media® Player 9 Series (or other third-party media player)  
on a personal computer, or with an AV amplifier with on-  
board WMA9 Pro decoding.  
Adaptive Decorrelation™  
By slightly changing one surround channel's time and  
phase relationship with respect to the other surround  
channel, Adaptive Decorrelation expands the listening  
position and creates the same spacious surround  
experience as in a movie theater using only two speakers.  
Windows Media® and the Windows logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
THX Ultra2™  
Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2™  
certified, it must incorporate all the features described  
here and also pass a rigorous series of quality and  
performance tests. THX Ultra2™ requirements cover  
every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier  
performance and operation, and hundreds of other  
parameters in both the digital and analog domain.  
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)  
PCM (also known as Linear PCM) is a digital audio  
coding system that does not use compression to reduce  
the amount of data needed to represent the analog audio.  
PCM audio can be found on CDs and some DVDs.  
About THX®  
THX Surround EX™  
THX Surround EX-Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint  
development of THX Ltd. and Dolby Laboratories, Inc.  
This technology reproduces an additional surround back  
channel, bringing greater depth, spacious ambience,  
sound localization and detailed imaging behind the  
listener.  
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies  
established by the world-renowned film production  
company, Lucasfilm Ltd. These were designed to make  
film soundtracks, in both movie theaters and in your  
home theater, as faithful as possible to what the director  
intended.  
This product may also engage the THX Surround EX  
mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is  
not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such case the  
information delivered to the surround back channel may  
have unpredictable results.  
The THX technologies are explained below. See  
www.thx.com for more detailed information.  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Advanced Speaker Array™ (ASA)  
When you set up your home theater system using all  
eight speaker outputs and the two surround back  
speakers are placed close together as shown in the  
diagram in THX speaker system setup on page 98, the  
surround sound experience is optimized for THX Ultra2™  
Cinema and THX MusicMode.  
THX's ASA circuitry will automatically detect DTS-ES  
(Matrix and 6.1Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX  
encoded soundtracks for correct playback using all 8  
speakers.  
Please note that some Dolby Digital Surround EX  
soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows ASA  
to switch automatically. Therefore, if you know that the  
movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX,  
you may manually select the THX Surround EX playback  
mode.  
THX Ultra2™ Cinema mode  
This mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers giving  
you the best possible movie watching experience. In this  
mode ASA processing blends the side surround  
speakers and back surround speakers giving you the  
optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds.  
THX MusicMode™  
ASA technology optimizes playback of 5.1 encoded  
music sources such as DTS and Dolby Digital using all 8  
speakers in your setup.  
Boundary Gain Compensation™  
Depending on the listener’s and the subwoofer’s  
position, the listener may experience an excessive bass  
effect. This feature compensates for excessive bass  
resulting from a boundary gain effect. This feature is  
designed to operate when used with a subwoofer  
certified to THX Ultra2™ specifications.  
THX and Ultra 2 are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
THX Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of  
THX Ltd. and Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of  
Dolby Laboratories, Inc. Used under authorization. All  
rights reserved.  
Maintenance of external surfaces  
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and  
dirt.  
• When the surfaces are dirty, wipe with a soft cloth  
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six  
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe  
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or  
cleaners.  
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or  
other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will  
corrode the surfaces.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Specifications  
12  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 dB  
Frequency Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 MHz dB  
Amplifier section  
FM Tuner Section  
Continuous average power output of 160 watts* per  
channel, min., at 6 ohms, from 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz with  
no more than 0.09%** total harmonic distortion (front).  
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Usable Sensitivity . . . . . .Mono: 13.2 dBf, IHF (1.3 µV/75 )  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 20.2 dBf  
Stereo: 38.6 dBf  
Continuous Power Output (6 )  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . .Mono: 73 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Stereo: 70 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo: 0.5% (1 kHz)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . .60 dB (400 kHz)  
Stereo Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 dB (1 kHz)  
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Hz to 15 kHz 1dB  
Antenna Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 unbalanced  
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 W + 160 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09%)  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09%)  
Surround . . . . . . . . . 160 W + 160 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09%)  
Surr. back . . . . . . . . 160 W + 160 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09%)  
Continuous Power Output (8 )  
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 W + 130 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09%)  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09%)  
Surround . . . . . . . . . 130 W + 130 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09%)  
Surr. back . . . . . . . . 130 W + 130 W (20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.09%)  
AM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1,700 kHz  
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 µV/m  
Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 dB  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna  
Audio Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
PHONO MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 mV/47 kΩ  
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 mV/47 kΩ  
Phono Overload level (T.H.D.0.1%, 1kHz)  
PHONO MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 mV  
Frequency Response  
PHONO MM . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Hz to 20,000 Hz 0.3 dB  
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 100,000 Hz dB  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 mV/2.2 kΩ  
Tone Control  
Miscellaneous  
Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .735 W, 970 VA  
Power Consumption in Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . 0.65 W  
AC Outlet  
SWITCHED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W (0.8 A) MAX  
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 (W) × 204 (H) × 476 (D) mm  
(17-5/16 (W) × 8 (H) × 18-3/4 (D) in.)  
Weight (without package). . . . . . . . . . .31.0 kg (68.4 lb 6 oz)  
BASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dB (100 Hz)  
TREBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dB (10 kHz)  
LOUDNESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . +4/+2 dB (100Hz/10 kHz)  
(at volume position -40dB)  
Furnished Parts  
Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Remote control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Remote control unit recharger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AC adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
U-shaped connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
These operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)  
PHONO MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 dB  
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]  
PHONO MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 dB  
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 dB  
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission’s  
Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for Amplifiers  
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer  
Note  
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice, due to improvements.  
Video Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 dB  
®
This product includes FontAvenue fonts licensed by  
NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark  
of NEC corporation.  
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz to 10 MHz dB  
Component Video Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2003 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
<03J00001>  
Printed in Japan  
<ARB7290-A>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Philips Cordless Telephone M550 User Manual
Philips CRT Television TS2574C User Manual
Philips Espresso Maker HD8325 01 User Manual
Philips MP3 Player ACT400 11 User Manual
Philips Range AJ3280 User Manual
Philips Styling Iron HP4655 07 User Manual
Planar Battery Charger BAT24SI User Manual
Planar Car Video System PJT195RW User Manual
Polaroid TV DVD Combo FXM 1911C User Manual
Poulan Tiller 164739 User Manual